1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
127 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
132 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
159 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
160 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
161 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
162 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
163 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
166 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
167 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
168 \author 274215730 "scott"
169 \author 630872221 "Jean-Pierre Chrétien" jeanpierre.chretien@free.fr
170 \author 1549938239 "Kornel Benko"
171 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
182 by the \SpecialChar LyX
187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
189 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
190 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
191 Documentation mailing list:
192 \begin_inset CommandInset href
194 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
206 \begin_inset Newline newline
210 \begin_inset Newline newline
214 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
216 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
220 \begin_inset Note Note
223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
224 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
225 \begin_inset Newline newline
230 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
238 \begin_layout Standard
239 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
240 LatexCommand tableofcontents
247 \begin_layout Chapter
251 \begin_layout Section
252 What is \SpecialChar LyX
256 \begin_layout Standard
258 is a document preparation system.
259 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
260 scripts, publishable books, business
261 letters and proposals,
262 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
266 It is unlike most other
267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
274 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
276 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
292 pt type, left justified, 5
293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
302 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
312 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
316 \begin_layout Standard
321 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
322 's philosophy: most importantly,
323 the format of all of the manuals.
324 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
325 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
326 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
329 \begin_layout Section
334 \begin_layout Standard
335 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
336 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
338 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
339 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
345 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
346 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
348 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
349 only a vertical scrollbar.
352 \begin_layout Standard
353 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
354 The first case is large images.
355 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
356 the image and use the option
367 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
370 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
373 \begin_layout Standard
374 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
375 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
383 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
390 \begin_layout Section
394 \begin_layout Standard
395 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
397 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
399 Just select the manual you want to read from the
406 \begin_layout Section
407 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
411 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
418 \begin_layout Standard
419 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
420 can be configured via the menu
422 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
426 \begin_inset Index idx
429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
436 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
438 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
439 packages are available.
440 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
442 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
443 was installed on your system,
444 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
445 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
449 \begin_inset space \space{}
452 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
453 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
455 To force \SpecialChar LyX
456 to re-inspect your system use
458 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
462 \begin_inset Index idx
465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
466 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
472 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
473 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
476 \begin_layout Section
479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
481 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
488 \begin_layout Standard
489 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
490 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
491 installed but you will not be
493 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
494 or print your documents
498 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
499 Some \SpecialChar LyX
500 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
509 which can produce PDFs and the like.
512 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
514 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
517 every \SpecialChar LyX
518 document can still be output as plain text
519 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
525 \begin_layout Standard
526 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
528 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
532 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
533 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
536 \begin_layout Standard
537 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
538 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
539 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
542 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
550 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
551 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
554 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
558 \begin_inset Index idx
561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
562 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
570 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
577 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
581 \begin_layout Chapter
582 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
586 \begin_layout Section
587 Basic File Operations
588 \begin_inset Index idx
591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
600 \begin_layout Standard
605 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
606 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
609 \begin_layout Itemize
631 \begin_layout Itemize
647 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
653 \begin_layout Itemize
675 \begin_layout Itemize
683 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
687 \begin_layout Itemize
689 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
701 \begin_layout Itemize
713 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
717 \begin_layout Itemize
719 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
727 \begin_layout Itemize
749 \begin_layout Itemize
761 arg "buffer-write-as"
765 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
769 \begin_layout Itemize
771 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
783 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202805
787 \begin_layout Itemize
789 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202811
797 \begin_layout Itemize
811 \begin_layout Itemize
825 \begin_layout Standard
826 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
827 few minor differences.
830 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
841 command lists the available templates.
842 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
843 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
844 and possibly propose text fragments
846 for the document, features
847 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
850 you would otherwise need to
851 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
853 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
857 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
861 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
869 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
875 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
876 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
880 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
888 \begin_layout Standard
889 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
921 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
922 to open a file or create a new one, that big
923 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
927 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
931 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
942 \begin_layout Standard
964 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
966 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
969 people work on the same document at the same time.
973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
974 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
977 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
982 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
983 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
985 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
987 \begin_inset Flex Emph
990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
992 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
993 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
1002 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1007 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1015 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1026 \begin_inset space ~
1030 \begin_inset space ~
1035 will reload the document from disk.
1036 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1037 and want to restore it to the last save
1038 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1045 \begin_inset space ~
1050 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1051 them as your changes.
1054 \begin_layout Section
1055 Basic Editing Features
1056 \begin_inset Index idx
1059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1068 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1075 \begin_layout Standard
1076 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1077 can perform cut and paste operations
1078 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1079 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1080 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1081 editing features and how to access
1083 We will start with cut and paste.
1086 \begin_layout Standard
1087 As you might expect, the
1091 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1092 various other editing features.
1093 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1097 \begin_layout Itemize
1103 \begin_inset Index idx
1106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1135 \begin_layout Itemize
1141 \begin_inset Index idx
1144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1173 \begin_layout Itemize
1179 \begin_inset Index idx
1182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1207 \begin_layout Itemize
1211 \begin_inset space ~
1217 \begin_layout Itemize
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1227 \begin_layout Itemize
1231 \begin_inset space ~
1235 \begin_inset space ~
1241 \begin_inset Index idx
1244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1253 \begin_inset Index idx
1256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1271 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1281 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1287 \begin_layout Standard
1288 The first three are self-explanatory.
1289 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1290 and other programs using
1311 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1312 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1317 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1318 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1319 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1320 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1321 into individual cells.
1325 \begin_inset space ~
1330 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1331 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1335 \begin_layout Standard
1339 \begin_inset space ~
1344 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1346 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1348 \begin_inset space ~
1355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1361 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1362 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1363 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1365 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1369 \begin_inset space \space{}
1372 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1373 text which is often meaningless.)
1376 \begin_layout Standard
1380 \begin_inset space ~
1383 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1385 \begin_inset space ~
1389 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1393 \begin_inset space ~
1402 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1403 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1404 is inserted as one paragraph.
1405 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1409 \begin_inset space ~
1414 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1415 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1421 \begin_inset space ~
1424 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1426 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1430 \begin_inset space ~
1438 \begin_inset space ~
1441 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1444 paste from the primary selection.
1445 This is normally the currently selected text.
1448 \begin_layout Standard
1451 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1453 \begin_inset space ~
1457 \begin_inset space ~
1465 \begin_inset space ~
1469 \begin_inset space ~
1475 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466403
1477 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466406
1481 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1484 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466954
1489 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1492 \begin_inset space ~
1503 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466364
1505 \begin_inset space ~
1509 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466368
1511 \begin_inset space ~
1519 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466698
1533 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1537 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1541 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466747
1545 \begin_inset space ~
1557 arg "word-find-backward"
1560 shortcut) to search backwards
1564 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466989
1565 Even if you close the widget,
1574 arg "word-find-backward"
1577 will search further.
1582 \begin_layout Standard
1584 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467040
1589 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1592 \begin_inset space ~
1597 field and searches the next match.
1603 \begin_inset space ~
1608 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1610 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467539
1612 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467537
1616 \begin_layout Standard
1618 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467208
1619 Furthermore, the following options are available:
1622 \begin_layout Itemize
1625 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467225
1631 \begin_inset space ~
1637 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467228
1640 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
1641 If the toggle is set, searching for
1642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1653 will not match the word
1654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1667 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467232
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1674 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467234
1678 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467207
1682 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467237
1687 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1688 to only find complete words, e.
1689 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1693 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1722 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467241
1726 \begin_layout Itemize
1729 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467258
1734 will limit search and replace, or replace all, to the current cursor selection.
1737 \begin_layout Itemize
1740 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467288
1745 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input, without pressing the
1749 \begin_inset space ~
1757 \begin_layout Itemize
1759 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467400
1764 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has
1765 been reached without asking.
1766 If this is not checked, a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
1767 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
1768 so you need to put it back manually.
1771 \begin_layout Standard
1772 \paragraph_spacing single
1774 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
1775 The widget also has a
1779 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search
1780 widget), hiding replace and options.
1782 \change_deleted 630872221 1620400535
1784 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
1789 button brings you back to the full size.
1792 \begin_layout Standard
1793 \paragraph_spacing single
1796 also offers an advanced
1799 \begin_inset space ~
1803 \begin_inset space ~
1808 feature that is described in section
1809 \begin_inset space ~
1813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1815 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1822 \begin_layout Standard
1823 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1824 \begin_inset space \space{}
1828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1836 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1838 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1843 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1850 \begin_layout Standard
1854 arg "inset-select-all"
1857 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1858 When the cursor is inside an inset
1861 arg "inset-select-all"
1864 selects the content of the inset.
1868 arg "inset-select-all"
1871 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1872 then to the whole document.
1876 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1879 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1883 \begin_layout Section
1885 \begin_inset Index idx
1888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1895 \begin_inset Index idx
1898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1905 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1907 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1914 \begin_layout Standard
1915 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1917 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1920 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1923 or the toolbar button
1930 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1932 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1935 or the toolbar button
1942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1949 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1950 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1953 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1956 \begin_layout Standard
1958 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
1959 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1968 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1969 This is a consequence of the 100
1970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1973 step undo limit mentioned above.
1976 \begin_layout Standard
1985 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1987 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
1991 \begin_layout Section
1993 \begin_inset Index idx
1996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2005 \begin_layout Standard
2006 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2009 \begin_layout Enumerate
2014 \begin_layout Itemize
2019 once anywhere in the edit window.
2020 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2024 \begin_layout Enumerate
2029 \begin_layout Itemize
2036 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2039 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2042 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2043 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2045 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
2046 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
2052 \begin_layout Itemize
2053 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2056 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2063 \begin_layout Enumerate
2064 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
2068 \begin_layout Standard
2069 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2070 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2074 \begin_layout Section
2076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2078 name "sec:Navigating"
2083 \begin_inset Index idx
2086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2095 \begin_layout Standard
2097 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2100 \begin_layout Itemize
2105 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
2106 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2109 \begin_layout Itemize
2110 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
2112 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2114 \begin_inset space ~
2119 or by the toolbar button
2122 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2128 \begin_layout Itemize
2129 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2131 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2134 and use the same menu to return to them.
2135 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2138 \begin_layout Standard
2142 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2147 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2148 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2150 \begin_inset space ~
2155 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2156 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
2157 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
2158 last editing position.
2161 \begin_layout Standard
2166 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2170 \begin_layout Subsection
2172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2174 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2179 \begin_inset Index idx
2182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2183 Navigating ! Outline
2189 \begin_inset Index idx
2192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2201 \begin_layout Standard
2202 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
2203 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
2204 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
2205 \begin_inset space ~
2209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2211 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2215 ), notes, or citations (see section
2216 \begin_inset space ~
2220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2222 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2227 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2231 \begin_layout Standard
2232 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2233 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2234 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2235 dialog and to modify the citation.
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2243 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2244 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2246 Labels and References
2248 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2257 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2260 \begin_layout Standard
2261 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2262 control the display.
2267 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2268 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2273 option keeps it in the current view state.
2274 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2275 \begin_inset space ~
2278 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2279 \begin_inset space ~
2282 3, the subsections of sections
2283 \begin_inset space ~
2286 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2291 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2292 \begin_inset space ~
2296 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2306 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2309 \begin_layout Standard
2316 button refreshes the TOC (
2317 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2319 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2323 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2325 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2329 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2333 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2337 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2341 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2343 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2347 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2349 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2353 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2355 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2359 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2363 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2365 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2369 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2373 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2377 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2381 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2385 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2389 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2393 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2397 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2399 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2403 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2417 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2418 For example, you can move section
2419 \begin_inset space ~
2423 \begin_inset space ~
2426 2.4 or after section
2427 \begin_inset space ~
2432 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2445 (or the corresponding key bindings
2453 ) you can change the level of sections.
2454 You can make section
2455 \begin_inset space ~
2459 \begin_inset space ~
2463 \begin_inset space ~
2469 \begin_layout Standard
2470 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2471 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2474 \begin_layout Subsection
2475 Horizontal Scrolling
2476 \begin_inset Index idx
2479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2480 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2488 \begin_layout Standard
2490 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2492 \begin_inset space ~
2495 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2496 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2497 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2501 \begin_layout Standard
2502 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2506 \begin_layout Itemize
2508 is used on a small tablet computer
2511 \begin_layout Itemize
2512 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2524 \begin_inset space ~
2537 \begin_layout Itemize
2538 Math constructs with long command names
2541 \begin_layout Standard
2542 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2543 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2545 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2546 window so that table
2547 \begin_inset space ~
2551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2553 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2558 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2560 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2561 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2564 \begin_layout Standard
2565 \begin_inset Float table
2572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2573 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2578 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2582 Horizontal scrolling test.
2590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2592 \begin_inset Tabular
2593 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2594 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2595 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2596 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2597 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2639 \begin_layout Section
2640 Input/Word Completion
2641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2643 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2648 \begin_inset Index idx
2651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2658 \begin_inset Index idx
2661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2692 \begin_layout Standard
2694 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2696 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2697 is used to propose completions.
2700 \begin_layout Standard
2701 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2704 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2709 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2716 \begin_inset space ~
2720 \begin_inset space ~
2725 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2729 \begin_inset space ~
2734 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2735 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2739 \begin_inset space ~
2745 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2746 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2747 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2748 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2751 \begin_layout Standard
2753 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2754 completions available.
2759 key to accept a proposed completion.
2760 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2761 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2762 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2765 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2772 \begin_layout Standard
2773 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2774 ing options for text.
2776 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2778 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2780 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2783 he special math option
2787 enables characters to be composed.
2789 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2791 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2795 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2798 you want to insert the character
2799 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2803 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2806 input the characters
2807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2819 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2821 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2825 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2827 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2832 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2834 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2837 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2840 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2842 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2845 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2850 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2852 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2856 's installation folder.
2858 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2859 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2866 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2871 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2872 In the example above,
2877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2909 \begin_layout Section
2911 \begin_inset Index idx
2914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2921 \begin_inset Index idx
2924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2953 \begin_inset Index idx
2956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2987 \begin_layout Standard
2988 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
3002 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3005 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3009 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3010 \begin_inset space ~
3014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3016 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3023 \begin_layout Standard
3027 \begin_inset space ~
3035 \begin_inset space ~
3056 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
3060 \begin_layout Labeling
3061 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3065 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3066 LatexCommand nomenclature
3068 description "Tabulator key"
3075 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3077 If you do not understand this, go read sections
3078 \begin_inset space ~
3082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3084 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3091 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3095 , especially section
3096 \begin_inset space ~
3100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3102 reference "subsec:Lists"
3108 If you are still confused, look in the
3113 \begin_inset Newline newline
3121 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
3122 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
3126 \begin_layout Labeling
3127 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3131 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3132 LatexCommand nomenclature
3134 description "Escape key"
3142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3149 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
3150 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3153 \begin_layout Labeling
3154 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3159 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
3160 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
3164 \begin_layout Standard
3165 There are three modifier keys:
3168 \begin_layout Labeling
3169 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3187 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3188 LatexCommand nomenclature
3190 description "Control key"
3195 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
3196 on which keys it is used in combination with:
3200 \begin_layout Itemize
3209 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3212 \begin_layout Itemize
3221 , it moves by words instead of characters.
3224 \begin_layout Itemize
3233 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3237 \begin_layout Labeling
3238 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3256 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3257 LatexCommand nomenclature
3259 description "Shift key"
3264 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3265 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3268 \begin_layout Labeling
3269 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3287 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3288 LatexCommand nomenclature
3290 description "Alt or Meta key"
3295 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3296 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3297 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3303 \begin_inset Newline newline
3306 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3308 menu accelerator keys
3311 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3312 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3316 \begin_layout Standard
3317 For example, the sequence
3318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3324 \begin_inset space ~
3328 \begin_inset space ~
3334 \begin_inset space ~
3342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3361 \begin_inset space ~
3367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3377 \begin_layout Standard
3382 manual lists all other things bound to the
3390 \begin_layout Standard
3391 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3393 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3395 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3396 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3398 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3399 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3400 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3402 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3418 followed by a capital
3425 \begin_layout Chapter
3428 \begin_inset Index idx
3431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3441 \begin_layout Section
3443 \begin_inset Index idx
3446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3455 \begin_layout Subsection
3459 \begin_layout Standard
3460 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3461 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3462 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3463 numbering schemes, and so on.
3464 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3465 and format the title of your document differently.
3468 \begin_layout Standard
3473 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3474 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3475 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3476 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3477 picks one for you by default.
3478 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3481 \begin_layout Subsection
3483 \begin_inset Index idx
3486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3495 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3502 \begin_layout Standard
3503 You can select a class using the
3505 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3506 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3510 \begin_inset Index idx
3513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3520 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3524 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3528 \begin_layout Standard
3529 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3534 \begin_layout Description
3535 Article for basic articles
3538 \begin_layout Description
3539 Report for basic reports
3542 \begin_layout Description
3543 Book for writing a book
3546 \begin_layout Description
3547 Letter for US-style letters
3550 \begin_layout Standard
3551 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3552 only uses if you have installed
3553 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3554 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3555 distributions will include
3557 Here are some of the classes.
3558 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3560 Special Document Classes
3569 \begin_layout Description
3570 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3573 \begin_layout Description
3574 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3578 \begin_layout Description
3579 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3583 \begin_layout Description
3584 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3585 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3586 There are three article layouts available.
3587 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3588 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3589 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3590 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3595 sequential numbering
3596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3599 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3600 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3601 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3602 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3605 \begin_layout Description
3606 Beamer Layout for presentations
3609 \begin_layout Description
3610 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3611 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3612 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3613 with \SpecialChar LyX
3617 \begin_layout Description
3618 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3621 \begin_layout Description
3623 \begin_inset space ~
3626 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3629 \begin_layout Description
3630 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3633 \begin_layout Description
3634 Foils Used to make transparencies
3637 \begin_layout Description
3638 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3639 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3640 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3641 with \SpecialChar LyX
3645 \begin_layout Description
3646 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3647 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3650 \begin_layout Description
3651 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3654 \begin_layout Description
3655 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3658 \begin_layout Description
3659 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3660 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3661 (Is used by this document.)
3664 \begin_layout Description
3665 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3668 \begin_layout Description
3669 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3672 \begin_layout Description
3677 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3678 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3680 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3684 \begin_layout Description
3685 Slides Used to make transparencies
3688 \begin_layout Description
3690 \begin_inset space ~
3693 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3694 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3697 \begin_layout Description
3698 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3701 \begin_layout Standard
3702 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3704 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3706 Special Document Classes
3713 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3714 of the document classes.
3717 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3721 \begin_layout Standard
3722 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3724 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3725 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3727 \begin_inset Index idx
3730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3747 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3748 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3750 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3753 \begin_layout Standard
3756 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3761 , are highly specialized.
3763 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3764 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3765 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3766 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3767 by some document class.
3768 There are just too many of them.
3769 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3772 \begin_layout Standard
3773 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3781 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3782 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3783 document class for a new file.
3785 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3788 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3795 manual for information on how to install them.
3796 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3802 \begin_layout Standard
3803 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3804 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3805 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3806 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3807 class files to be used for dissertation
3808 s submitted to those universities.
3809 The \SpecialChar LyX
3810 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3812 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3816 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3822 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3825 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3829 name "subsec:Modules"
3834 \begin_inset Index idx
3837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3846 \begin_layout Standard
3847 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3848 chosen document class.
3849 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3850 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3857 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3861 \begin_inset Index idx
3864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3871 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3875 \begin_layout Standard
3876 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3877 packages or file format converters that are not always
3878 installed by default.
3880 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3881 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3882 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3883 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3885 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3886 file without the missing prerequisites.
3887 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3888 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3891 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3895 \begin_inset Index idx
3898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3899 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3906 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3910 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3914 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3923 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3925 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3936 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3939 \begin_layout Standard
3940 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3948 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3950 will advise you about these things.
3958 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3960 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3962 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3967 \begin_inset Index idx
3970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3971 Document ! Local Layout
3979 \begin_layout Standard
3980 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3981 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3982 : They are intended to be used in
3983 a variety of different documents.
3984 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3985 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3986 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3987 need a specific inset or
3988 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3990 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
3993 style only that one time.
3994 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3996 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4014 manual for information on how to use it.
4017 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4021 \begin_layout Standard
4022 Each class has a default set of options.
4023 Here's a quick table describing them:
4026 \begin_layout Standard
4027 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4033 \begin_layout Standard
4035 \begin_inset Tabular
4036 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4037 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4038 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4039 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4040 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4041 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4042 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4496 \begin_layout Standard
4497 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4503 \begin_layout Standard
4504 You're probably also wondering what
4505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4509 \begin_inset space ~
4513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4517 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4518 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4523 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4528 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4538 headings, there are also
4546 headings, and so on.
4547 We will describe these headings fully in section
4548 \begin_inset space ~
4552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4554 reference "subsec:Headings"
4561 \begin_layout Subsection
4563 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4565 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4570 \begin_inset Index idx
4573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4580 \begin_inset Index idx
4583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4592 \begin_layout Standard
4593 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4595 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4602 \begin_inset space ~
4610 \begin_inset space ~
4615 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4617 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4618 doesn't support special options you want to
4619 use for your document.
4620 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4621 -class and its options, you have to read
4625 \begin_layout Standard
4627 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4631 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4635 \begin_inset space ~
4642 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4648 \begin_inset space ~
4653 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4654 You can choose between the following five options:
4657 \begin_layout Labeling
4658 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4663 Use default page style of current class.
4666 \begin_layout Labeling
4667 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4672 No page numbers or headings.
4675 \begin_layout Labeling
4676 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4684 \begin_layout Labeling
4685 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4690 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4691 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4692 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4693 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4696 \begin_layout Labeling
4697 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4702 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4703 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4709 \begin_inset Index idx
4712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4720 How they are defined is explained in section
4721 \begin_inset space ~
4725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4727 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4734 \begin_layout Standard
4735 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4736 \begin_inset space ~
4740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4742 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4749 \begin_layout Subsection
4750 Paper Size and Orientation
4751 \begin_inset Index idx
4754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4755 Document ! Paper size
4761 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4763 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4770 \begin_layout Standard
4771 You can find the following options in the menu
4774 \begin_inset space ~
4781 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4785 \begin_inset Index idx
4788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4797 \begin_layout Labeling
4798 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4802 \begin_inset space ~
4807 What size paper to print on.
4812 \begin_layout Itemize
4818 \begin_layout Itemize
4824 \begin_layout Itemize
4830 \begin_layout Itemize
4836 \begin_layout Itemize
4839 US letter, US legal, US executive
4842 \begin_layout Itemize
4848 \begin_layout Itemize
4855 \begin_layout Labeling
4856 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4861 To choose whether to output as
4872 \begin_layout Labeling
4873 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4877 \begin_inset space ~
4882 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4883 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4886 \begin_layout Subsection
4888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4890 name "subsec:Margins"
4895 \begin_inset Index idx
4898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4905 \begin_inset Index idx
4908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4917 \begin_layout Standard
4918 Paper margins are set in the menu
4920 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4924 \begin_inset Index idx
4927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4936 \begin_layout Standard
4937 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4938 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4939 the paper format and the font size into account.
4942 \begin_layout Subsection
4946 \begin_layout Standard
4947 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4948 has to convert everything into the new
4950 That includes the paragraph environments.
4951 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4952 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4953 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4955 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4964 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4966 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4967 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4968 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4971 \begin_layout Section
4972 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4973 \begin_inset Index idx
4976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4977 Paragraph ! Indentation
4985 \begin_layout Subsection
4987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4989 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4996 \begin_layout Standard
4997 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4998 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
5001 \begin_layout Standard
5002 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5003 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5004 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5005 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5009 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
5015 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5016 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
5017 language than English.
5019 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5022 \begin_layout Standard
5023 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
5024 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
5025 into \SpecialChar LyX
5027 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5030 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
5032 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
5033 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
5034 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
5039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5041 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5042 goes to produce a printable file.
5047 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5049 gives you the ability globally to change
5053 these pre-coded spacings.
5054 We will explain more later.
5057 \begin_layout Subsection
5058 Paragraph Separation
5059 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5061 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5066 \begin_inset Index idx
5069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5070 Paragraph ! Separation
5078 \begin_layout Standard
5086 \begin_inset space ~
5094 \begin_inset space ~
5101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5105 \begin_inset Index idx
5108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5114 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
5117 \begin_layout Subsection
5121 \begin_layout Standard
5122 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5125 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5127 \begin_inset space ~
5132 dialog and toggle the
5135 \begin_inset space ~
5140 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5143 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5147 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
5148 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
5152 \begin_layout Standard
5153 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
5154 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5157 \begin_layout Subsection
5159 \begin_inset Index idx
5162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5163 Paragraph ! Line spacing
5171 \begin_layout Standard
5174 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5178 \begin_inset Index idx
5181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5190 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5194 \begin_inset space ~
5203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5204 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5210 \begin_inset Index idx
5213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5220 installed to use this feature.
5225 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5227 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5229 \begin_inset space ~
5234 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5235 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5238 \begin_layout Section
5239 Paragraph Environments
5240 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5242 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5247 \begin_inset Index idx
5250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5251 Paragraph ! Environments
5257 \begin_inset Index idx
5260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5261 Paragraph environments|(
5269 \begin_layout Subsection
5273 \begin_layout Standard
5274 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5277 \begin_layout Standard
5286 } \SpecialChar ldots
5296 \begin_inset Newline newline
5299 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5301 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5302 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5303 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5312 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5315 \begin_layout Standard
5316 A paragraph environment is simply a
5317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5324 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5325 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5326 scheme, labels, and so on.
5327 Additionally, you can
5328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5335 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5336 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5337 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5338 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5340 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5342 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5345 \begin_layout Standard
5346 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5347 \begin_inset Graphics
5348 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5354 at the left end of the toolbar.
5356 will change the environment of the
5360 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5361 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5362 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5365 \begin_layout Standard
5374 create a new paragraph using the
5378 paragraph environment.
5380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5387 because if you are in one of these environments:
5390 \begin_layout Itemize
5396 \begin_layout Itemize
5402 \begin_layout Itemize
5408 \begin_layout Itemize
5414 \begin_layout Itemize
5420 \begin_layout Itemize
5426 \begin_layout Itemize
5432 \begin_layout Standard
5434 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5438 , rather than resetting it to
5443 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5444 \begin_inset space ~
5448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5450 reference "sec:Nesting"
5457 \begin_layout Subsection
5461 \begin_layout Standard
5462 The default paragraph environment is
5467 It creates a plain paragraph.
5469 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5470 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5471 this manual) are in the
5478 \begin_layout Standard
5479 You can nest a paragraph using the
5483 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5491 \begin_layout Subsection
5493 \begin_inset Index idx
5496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5505 \begin_layout Standard
5506 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5507 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5516 for thanks or contact information.
5517 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5518 places all of this on a separate page
5519 along with today's date.
5520 For other types of documents, the title
5521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5528 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5531 \begin_layout Standard
5533 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5547 Here's how you use them:
5550 \begin_layout Itemize
5551 Put the title of your document in the
5558 \begin_layout Itemize
5559 Put the author name in the
5566 \begin_layout Itemize
5567 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5568 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5574 Note that using this environment is optional.
5575 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5576 will automatically insert today's date.
5577 If you don't want a date, use the option
5579 Suppress default date on front page
5583 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5584 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5586 \begin_inset space ~
5594 \begin_layout Standard
5595 You can use footnotes to insert
5596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5603 or contact information.
5606 \begin_layout Subsection
5608 \begin_inset Index idx
5611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5618 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5620 name "subsec:Headings"
5627 \begin_layout Standard
5628 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5630 takes care of the numbering for you.
5633 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5635 \begin_inset Index idx
5638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5639 Section headings ! Numbered
5647 \begin_layout Standard
5648 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5652 \begin_layout Enumerate
5658 \begin_layout Enumerate
5664 \begin_layout Enumerate
5670 \begin_layout Enumerate
5676 \begin_layout Enumerate
5682 \begin_layout Enumerate
5688 \begin_layout Enumerate
5694 \begin_layout Standard
5696 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5697 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5698 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5699 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
5701 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
5703 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5709 \begin_layout Standard
5710 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5711 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5712 You group the book into chapters.
5714 does a similar grouping:
5717 \begin_layout Itemize
5722 is divided into either
5733 \begin_layout Itemize
5745 \begin_layout Itemize
5757 \begin_layout Itemize
5769 \begin_layout Itemize
5781 \begin_layout Itemize
5793 \begin_layout Standard
5794 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5802 Not all document types use the
5806 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5811 is the top-level heading.
5819 \begin_layout Standard
5824 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5825 labels it with its number,
5826 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5828 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5840 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5842 \begin_inset Index idx
5845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5846 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5854 \begin_layout Standard
5855 The unnumbered section headings have a
5856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5863 at the end of their name.
5864 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5865 the table of contents, see section
5866 \begin_inset space ~
5870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5879 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5880 Changing the Numbering
5881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5883 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5890 \begin_layout Standard
5891 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5892 in the Table of Contents.
5893 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5895 Just as certain classes start with
5909 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5919 This is something you can change.
5922 \begin_layout Standard
5925 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5929 \begin_inset Index idx
5932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5941 \begin_inset space ~
5945 \begin_inset space ~
5950 you will see two counters.
5955 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5956 numbers a section heading.
5957 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5961 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5962 Short Titles of Headings
5963 \begin_inset Index idx
5966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5967 Section headings ! Short titles
5973 \begin_inset Argument 1
5976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5983 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5985 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5992 \begin_layout Standard
5993 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5994 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5995 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5996 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5999 \begin_layout Standard
6001 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
6002 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6003 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6004 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6007 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6009 \begin_inset space ~
6015 This will insert a box labeled
6016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6020 \begin_inset space ~
6024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6027 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6028 This also works for captions inside floats.
6029 There can only be one short title per title.
6032 \begin_layout Standard
6033 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6036 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6040 \begin_layout Standard
6041 The following information applies to all section headings:
6044 \begin_layout Itemize
6045 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6048 \begin_layout Itemize
6049 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6052 \begin_layout Itemize
6053 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6056 \begin_layout Itemize
6057 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6060 \begin_layout Subsection
6064 \begin_layout Standard
6066 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6080 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6081 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6082 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
6083 the text they contain.
6084 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
6092 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6095 \begin_layout Standard
6096 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
6105 when you start a new paragraph.
6106 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6110 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6111 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
6112 have to change back to the
6116 environment yourself.
6119 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6121 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6128 \begin_inset Index idx
6131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6140 \begin_layout Standard
6141 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
6142 time for the differences.
6151 are identical except for one difference:
6155 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
6164 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
6167 \begin_layout Standard
6168 Here's an example of the
6181 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
6183 See – no indentation!
6187 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
6188 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
6189 the other paragraph.
6192 \begin_layout Standard
6193 Here's another example, this time in the
6200 \begin_layout Quotation
6206 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
6207 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
6208 the first line, then
6212 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
6216 you were quoting other text.
6219 \begin_layout Quotation
6220 Here's a new paragraph.
6221 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
6222 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
6225 \begin_layout Standard
6226 As the examples show,
6230 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6231 They should put quotes in the
6236 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6240 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6243 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6245 \begin_inset Index idx
6248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6255 \begin_inset Index idx
6258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6274 \begin_layout Standard
6279 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6285 \begin_inset Newline newline
6288 Which I did not rehearse!
6292 It could be much worse.
6293 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6295 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6296 indented a bit more than the first.
6297 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6303 \begin_inset Newline newline
6306 And make things look fine
6307 \begin_inset Newline newline
6313 arg "newline-insert newline"
6319 \begin_layout Standard
6324 does not indent both margins.
6325 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6326 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6329 arg "newline-insert newline"
6335 \begin_layout Subsection
6337 \begin_inset Index idx
6340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6347 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6356 \begin_layout Standard
6358 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6368 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6369 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6378 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6379 lets you provide your own label.
6380 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6381 describing some general features of all four of them.
6384 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6388 \begin_layout Standard
6389 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6391 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6392 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6401 reset the environment to
6405 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6406 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6407 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6411 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6415 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6422 \begin_layout Standard
6423 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6424 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6425 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6427 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6428 you read all of section
6429 \begin_inset space ~
6433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6435 reference "sec:Nesting"
6442 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6444 \begin_inset Index idx
6447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6463 \begin_layout Standard
6464 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6468 paragraph environment.
6469 It has the following properties:
6472 \begin_layout Itemize
6473 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6477 \begin_layout Itemize
6479 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6482 \begin_layout Itemize
6483 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6487 \begin_layout Itemize
6488 The items can have any length.
6490 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6491 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6498 \begin_layout Itemize
6503 environment inside another
6507 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6511 \begin_layout Itemize
6512 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6515 \begin_layout Itemize
6517 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6520 \begin_layout Itemize
6522 \begin_inset space ~
6526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6528 reference "sec:Nesting"
6532 for a full explanation of nesting.
6536 \begin_layout Standard
6537 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6546 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6549 \begin_layout Standard
6550 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6551 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6554 \begin_layout Itemize
6555 The label for the first level
6559 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6563 \begin_layout Itemize
6564 The label for the second level is a dash.
6568 \begin_layout Itemize
6569 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6573 \begin_layout Itemize
6574 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6578 \begin_layout Itemize
6579 Back out to the third level.
6583 \begin_layout Itemize
6584 Back to the second level.
6588 \begin_layout Itemize
6589 Back to the outermost level.
6592 \begin_layout Standard
6593 These are the default labels for an
6598 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6600 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6603 dialog in the submenu
6608 \begin_inset Index idx
6611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6617 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6621 \begin_layout Standard
6622 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6623 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6625 \begin_inset space ~
6629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6631 reference "sec:Nesting"
6638 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6640 \begin_inset Index idx
6643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6652 name "sec:Enumerate"
6659 \begin_layout Standard
6664 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6665 It has these properties:
6668 \begin_layout Enumerate
6669 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6673 \begin_layout Enumerate
6674 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6678 \begin_layout Enumerate
6680 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6683 \begin_layout Enumerate
6688 environment resets the counter to one.
6691 \begin_layout Enumerate
6704 \begin_layout Enumerate
6705 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6706 Items can have any length.
6709 \begin_layout Enumerate
6710 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6713 \begin_layout Enumerate
6714 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6717 \begin_layout Enumerate
6718 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6722 \begin_layout Standard
6731 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6733 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6734 labels the four different levels in an
6741 \begin_layout Enumerate
6742 The first level of an
6746 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6750 \begin_layout Enumerate
6751 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6755 \begin_layout Enumerate
6756 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6760 \begin_layout Enumerate
6761 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6764 \begin_layout Enumerate
6765 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6770 \begin_layout Enumerate
6771 Back to the third level
6775 \begin_layout Enumerate
6776 Back to the second level.
6780 \begin_layout Enumerate
6781 Back to the outermost level.
6784 \begin_layout Standard
6785 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6789 environment, see section
6790 \begin_inset space ~
6794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6796 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6801 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6805 \begin_layout Standard
6806 There is more to nesting
6810 environments than we've stated here.
6811 You should read section
6812 \begin_inset space ~
6816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6818 reference "sec:Nesting"
6822 to learn more about nesting.
6825 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6827 \begin_inset Index idx
6830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6839 \begin_layout Standard
6840 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6844 list has no fixed label.
6845 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6854 of the first line as the label.
6858 \begin_layout Description
6859 Example: This is an example of the
6866 \begin_layout Standard
6868 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6872 \begin_layout Standard
6874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6881 it is meant that the first usage of the
6885 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6887 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6888 \change_deleted 177693 1654619261
6892 \change_inserted 177693 1654619261
6901 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6906 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6907 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6909 \change_deleted 177693 1654619271
6911 \change_inserted 177693 1654619271
6915 \begin_inset space ~
6921 \begin_inset space ~
6925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6927 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6931 for more information.) Here is an example:
6934 \begin_layout Description
6936 \begin_inset space ~
6939 Example: This one shows how to use a
6940 \change_deleted 177693 1654619281
6944 \change_inserted 177693 1654619281
6948 \begin_inset space ~
6960 \begin_layout Description
6961 Usage: You should use the
6965 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6966 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6968 It's not a good idea to use a
6972 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6973 You're better off using
6985 paragraphs into them.
6988 \begin_layout Description
6989 Nesting: You can nest
6993 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6997 \begin_layout Standard
6998 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6999 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
7000 them from the first line.
7003 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7005 \begin_inset Index idx
7008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7017 \begin_layout Standard
7022 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7023 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
7027 \begin_layout Standard
7036 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
7038 Here are its properties:
7041 \begin_layout Labeling
7042 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7044 \begin_inset space ~
7047 labels \SpecialChar LyX
7049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7056 of each line as the item label.
7061 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
7062 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a
7063 \change_deleted 177693 1654619285
7065 \change_inserted 177693 1654619287
7068 space as described above.
7071 \begin_layout Labeling
7072 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7073 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
7074 uses different margins for the item label and the
7075 body of the item text.
7076 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
7077 label width plus a little extra space.
7080 \begin_layout Labeling
7081 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7083 \begin_inset space ~
7086 width \SpecialChar LyX
7087 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
7088 If the label width is larger, the label
7089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7096 into the first line.
7097 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
7098 margin of the rest of the item text.
7101 \begin_layout Labeling
7102 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7104 \begin_inset space ~
7107 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
7112 environment has the same left margin.
7113 \begin_inset Newline newline
7116 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
7119 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
7121 \begin_inset space ~
7126 dialog (toolbar button
7129 arg "layout-paragraph"
7136 \begin_inset space ~
7141 determines the default label width.
7142 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
7144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7151 multiple times instead.
7152 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
7155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7162 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
7165 \begin_inset space ~
7170 every time you alter a label in a
7175 \begin_inset Newline newline
7178 The predefined default width is the length of
7179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7187 \begin_inset space ~
7193 \begin_layout Standard
7198 list the same way as the
7202 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
7208 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
7212 \begin_layout Standard
7217 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
7218 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
7220 \begin_inset space ~
7224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7226 reference "sec:Nesting"
7230 to learn about nesting.
7233 \begin_layout Standard
7234 There is yet another feature of the
7238 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
7239 left-justifies the item labels by
7241 You can use additional
7244 \change_inserted 177693 1654621595
7249 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7250 justifies the item label.
7254 \change_inserted 177693 1654621600
7256 \change_deleted 177693 1654621601
7258 \change_inserted 177693 1654621603
7263 are documented in section
7264 \begin_inset space ~
7268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7270 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7275 Here are some examples:
7278 \begin_layout Labeling
7279 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7280 Left The default for
7287 \begin_layout Labeling
7288 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7289 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7295 \change_inserted 177693 1654621610
7300 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7303 \begin_layout Labeling
7304 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7305 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7309 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7315 \change_inserted 177693 1654621617
7320 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7323 \begin_layout Subsection
7325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7327 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7332 \begin_inset Index idx
7335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7344 \begin_layout Standard
7345 The features described in this section require that the module
7347 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7349 is loaded in the document settings.
7350 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7356 \begin_inset Index idx
7359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7369 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7370 Custom Enumerate Lists
7371 \begin_inset Index idx
7374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7375 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
7383 \begin_layout Standard
7385 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7388 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7391 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7392 There you add the command
7395 \begin_layout Standard
7403 \begin_layout Standard
7415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7416 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7417 Code, look at section
7418 \begin_inset space ~
7422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7424 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7437 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7444 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7445 For capital Roman numerals replace
7457 in the command above.
7458 For Arabic numerals use
7466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7473 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7488 \begin_layout Standard
7490 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7498 You can only number 26
7499 \begin_inset space ~
7502 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7510 \begin_layout Standard
7511 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7512 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7515 \begin_layout Standard
7516 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7519 \begin_layout Enumerate
7520 \begin_inset Argument 1
7523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7549 \begin_layout Enumerate
7550 \begin_inset Argument 1
7553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7576 \begin_layout Enumerate
7581 \begin_layout Enumerate
7582 \begin_inset Argument 1
7585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7609 \begin_layout Enumerate
7610 \begin_inset Argument 1
7613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7639 \begin_layout Standard
7640 For this list these commands were used:
7643 \begin_layout Standard
7654 \begin_inset Newline newline
7662 \begin_inset Newline newline
7670 \begin_inset Newline newline
7680 \begin_layout Standard
7687 makes the label emphasized and
7696 \begin_layout Standard
7697 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7705 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7706 lists until you change the definition.
7714 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7716 \begin_inset Index idx
7719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7720 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7728 \begin_layout Standard
7729 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7732 \begin_layout Enumerate
7733 \begin_inset Argument 1
7736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7755 \begin_inset Note Note
7758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7759 goes back to default numbering
7767 \begin_layout Enumerate
7771 \begin_layout Standard
7775 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7779 \begin_layout Standard
7780 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7786 \change_deleted -584632292 1616513280
7787 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7788 to indicate that it is a resumed list
7789 and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7790 , but in the output.
7795 \begin_layout Standard
7796 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7804 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7813 \begin_layout Standard
7814 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7816 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7817 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7818 of a normal enumeration.
7819 There, insert the command
7822 \begin_layout Standard
7828 \begin_layout Standard
7833 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7837 \begin_layout Enumerate
7841 \begin_layout Enumerate
7845 \begin_layout Standard
7846 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7849 \begin_layout Enumerate
7850 \begin_inset Argument 1
7853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7869 This enumeration starts at 4
7872 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7874 \begin_inset Index idx
7877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7886 \begin_layout Standard
7887 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7889 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7892 \begin_layout Itemize
7896 \begin_layout Itemize
7897 with standard spacing
7900 \begin_layout Standard
7901 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7903 Add there the command
7907 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7910 \begin_layout Itemize
7911 \begin_inset Argument 1
7914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7933 \begin_layout Itemize
7937 \begin_layout Itemize
7941 \begin_layout Standard
7942 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7949 \begin_inset Index idx
7952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7960 For more information see its documentation,
7961 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7971 \begin_layout Standard
7972 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7974 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7975 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7976 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7979 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7982 \begin_layout Enumerate
7983 \begin_inset Argument 1
7986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7994 parindent, labelsep=2cm
8007 \begin_layout Enumerate
8008 with negative indentation
8011 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8012 Further Customization
8013 \begin_inset Index idx
8016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8017 Lists ! Customization
8025 \begin_layout Standard
8026 You can also change the style of description lists.
8030 \begin_layout Standard
8036 \begin_layout Standard
8037 changes the description label font, the command
8040 \begin_layout Standard
8046 \begin_layout Standard
8047 sets the list style.
8050 \begin_layout Standard
8051 An example where the command
8054 \begin_layout Standard
8059 itshape, style=nextline
8062 \begin_layout Standard
8066 \begin_layout Description
8068 \begin_inset space ~
8072 \begin_inset Argument 1
8075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8081 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
8083 itshape, style=nextline
8093 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
8094 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
8098 \begin_layout Description
8100 \begin_inset space ~
8103 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
8104 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
8105 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
8108 \begin_layout Standard
8109 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8115 \begin_inset Index idx
8118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8126 For more information see its documentation
8127 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8137 \begin_layout Subsection
8139 \begin_inset Index idx
8142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8151 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8153 \begin_inset space ~
8156 Address: An Overview
8159 \begin_layout Standard
8160 Although \SpecialChar LyX
8161 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
8169 \begin_inset space ~
8175 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
8176 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
8177 gags on the document.
8178 In contrast, you can use the
8185 \begin_inset space ~
8190 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
8191 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
8195 \begin_layout Standard
8196 Of course, you're not limited to using
8203 \begin_inset space ~
8212 \begin_inset space ~
8217 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
8218 some European academic papers.
8221 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8225 name "sec:Address-Usage"
8232 \begin_layout Standard
8237 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
8238 for the opening and signature in some countries.
8242 \begin_inset space ~
8247 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
8248 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
8249 Here's an example of each:
8252 \begin_layout Right Address
8254 \begin_inset Newline newline
8258 \begin_inset Newline newline
8262 \begin_inset Newline newline
8265 When is it? What is today?
8268 \begin_layout Standard
8272 \begin_inset space ~
8278 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8280 the largest block of text on a single line.
8281 Here's an example of the
8288 \begin_layout Address
8290 \begin_inset Newline newline
8293 Where do I send this
8294 \begin_inset Newline newline
8297 Your post office and country
8300 \begin_layout Standard
8301 As you can see, both
8308 \begin_inset space ~
8313 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8318 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8319 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8325 This makes sense, since
8333 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8334 Thus, you have to use
8341 arg "newline-insert newline"
8346 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8347 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8349 \begin_inset space ~
8353 \begin_inset space ~
8358 ) to start a new line in an
8365 \begin_inset space ~
8373 \begin_layout Subsection
8377 \begin_layout Standard
8378 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8379 or list of references.
8381 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8384 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8386 \begin_inset Index idx
8389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8398 \begin_layout Standard
8403 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8404 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8405 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8406 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8410 in anything else or vice versa.
8416 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8417 The book document classes ignores the
8421 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
8425 in a letter document class.
8428 \begin_layout Standard
8433 environment does several things for you.
8434 First, it puts the centered label
8435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8443 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
8445 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
8446 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
8447 the subsequent text.
8448 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8450 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8454 \begin_layout Standard
8455 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8459 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8460 The new paragraph will still be in the
8465 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8466 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8469 \begin_layout Standard
8470 \begin_inset Float figure
8477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8479 \begin_inset Graphics
8480 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
8487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8488 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8493 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8514 \begin_layout Standard
8515 We would love to demonstrate the
8519 environment, but since this document is in the
8520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8527 class, we can't do this.
8528 We inserted it therefore as figure
8529 \begin_inset space ~
8533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8535 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8540 If you have never heard of an
8541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8548 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8551 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8553 \begin_inset Index idx
8556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8563 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8565 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8572 \begin_layout Standard
8577 environment is used to list references.
8578 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8579 only use it at the end of the document.
8591 \begin_layout Standard
8592 When you first open a
8596 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8597 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8613 depending on the document class.
8614 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8615 Each paragraph of the
8619 environment is a bibliography entry.
8624 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8625 Each new paragraph is still in the
8632 \begin_layout Standard
8633 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8634 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8636 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8638 handling, have a look at section
8639 \begin_inset space ~
8643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8645 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8652 \begin_layout Subsection
8653 Special Environments
8656 \begin_layout Standard
8658 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8659 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8662 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8667 \begin_inset Index idx
8670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8678 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8680 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8687 \begin_layout Standard
8693 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8695 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8700 key as a fixed whitespace.
8704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8715 \change_deleted 177693 1654619837
8719 \change_inserted 177693 1654619839
8723 \begin_inset space ~
8727 \change_deleted 177693 1654619842
8729 \change_inserted 177693 1654619844
8734 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8752 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8755 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8758 arg "newline-insert newline"
8775 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8776 So, when you finish using the
8781 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8782 Also, you can nest the
8787 environment inside of others.
8790 \begin_layout Standard
8791 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8794 \begin_layout Itemize
8798 arg "newline-insert newline"
8801 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8802 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8806 \begin_inset space \space{}
8816 arg "newline-insert newline"
8822 \begin_layout Itemize
8826 arg "newline-insert newline"
8836 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8842 \begin_layout Itemize
8843 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8844 You must put at least one
8848 in any line you want blank.
8849 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8853 \begin_layout Itemize
8854 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8858 since that will insert
8863 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8866 arg "self-insert \""
8872 \begin_layout Standard
8876 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8880 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8884 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8888 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8892 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8893 printf("Hello World!
8898 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8902 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8906 \begin_layout Standard
8907 This is just the standard
8908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8918 \begin_layout Standard
8924 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8926 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8927 as if you used a typewriter.
8928 \begin_inset Index idx
8931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8932 Paragraph environments|)
8937 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8940 Program Code Listings
8945 \begin_inset space ~
8953 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8957 \begin_inset Index idx
8960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8969 \begin_layout Standard
8974 environment is similar to the
8979 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8980 computer console text.
8985 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8999 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a
9000 \change_deleted 177693 1654619849
9002 \change_inserted 177693 1654619851
9005 space) and you can have empty lines.
9018 \begin_layout Itemize
9019 have a certain language and a text style
9022 \begin_layout Itemize
9023 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
9024 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
9025 and \SpecialChar TeX
9029 \begin_layout Standard
9030 Because of these properties
9034 works like a typewriter.
9038 \begin_layout Verbatim
9043 \begin_layout Verbatim
9047 The following 2 lines are empty:
9050 \begin_layout Verbatim
9054 \begin_layout Verbatim
9058 \begin_layout Verbatim
9060 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
9065 \begin_layout Standard
9070 environment is identical to
9074 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
9075 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
9082 \begin_layout Verbatim*
9087 \begin_layout Section
9088 Nesting Environments
9089 \begin_inset Index idx
9092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9093 Nesting ! Environments
9099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9108 \begin_layout Subsection
9112 \begin_layout Standard
9114 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
9116 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
9118 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
9120 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
9122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9132 \begin_layout Enumerate
9136 \begin_layout Enumerate
9141 \begin_layout Enumerate
9145 \begin_layout Enumerate
9150 \begin_layout Enumerate
9154 \begin_layout Standard
9155 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
9156 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
9158 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
9160 \begin_inset space ~
9164 \begin_inset space ~
9172 \begin_inset space ~
9176 \begin_inset space ~
9181 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
9183 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
9186 arg "depth-increment"
9192 arg "depth-decrement"
9206 arg "depth-increment"
9212 arg "depth-decrement"
9216 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
9217 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
9221 \begin_layout Standard
9222 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
9223 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
9224 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
9225 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
9226 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
9229 \begin_layout Standard
9230 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
9232 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
9234 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
9237 \begin_layout Subsection
9238 What You Can and Can't Nest
9241 \begin_layout Standard
9242 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
9243 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
9246 \begin_layout Standard
9247 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
9248 than a simple yes or no.
9249 There are three types of paragraph environments:
9252 \begin_layout Itemize
9253 Completely unnestable
9256 \begin_layout Itemize
9257 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
9261 \begin_layout Itemize
9262 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
9266 \begin_layout Standard
9267 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
9268 environments have them:
9271 \begin_layout Description
9272 Unnestable Can't nest them.
9273 Can't nest into them.
9277 \begin_layout Itemize
9283 \begin_layout Itemize
9289 \begin_layout Itemize
9295 \begin_layout Itemize
9301 \begin_layout Itemize
9308 \begin_layout Description
9310 \begin_inset space ~
9313 Nestable You can nest them.
9314 You can nest other things into them.
9318 \begin_layout Itemize
9324 \begin_layout Itemize
9330 \begin_layout Itemize
9336 \begin_layout Itemize
9342 \begin_layout Itemize
9348 \begin_layout Itemize
9354 \begin_layout Itemize
9360 \begin_layout Itemize
9367 \begin_layout Itemize
9373 \begin_layout Itemize
9380 \begin_layout Description
9381 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9382 You can't nest anything into them.
9386 \begin_layout Itemize
9392 \begin_layout Itemize
9398 \begin_layout Itemize
9404 \begin_layout Itemize
9410 \begin_layout Itemize
9416 \begin_layout Itemize
9422 \begin_layout Itemize
9428 \begin_layout Itemize
9434 \begin_layout Itemize
9440 \begin_layout Itemize
9446 \begin_layout Itemize
9452 \begin_layout Itemize
9458 \begin_layout Itemize
9464 \begin_layout Itemize
9468 \begin_inset space ~
9474 \begin_layout Itemize
9481 \begin_layout Standard
9482 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9490 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9500 \begin_inset space ~
9503 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9504 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9505 nested section headings violate this.
9513 \begin_layout Subsection
9514 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
9515 \begin_inset Index idx
9518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9519 Nesting ! Tables etc.
9527 \begin_layout Standard
9528 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9529 affected by nesting anyhow.
9533 \begin_layout Itemize
9537 \begin_layout Itemize
9541 \begin_layout Itemize
9545 \begin_layout Standard
9547 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9555 Figures and tables in
9559 are not affected by this.
9564 Have a look at section
9565 \begin_inset space ~
9569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9571 reference "sec:Floats"
9575 for more information about
9582 \begin_layout Standard
9584 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9585 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9589 \begin_layout Standard
9590 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9598 of its own, it behaves just like a
9599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9606 paragraph environment.
9607 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9611 \begin_layout Standard
9612 Here's an example with a table:
9615 \begin_layout Enumerate
9620 \begin_layout Enumerate
9621 This is (a) and it's nested.
9625 \begin_layout Standard
9626 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9632 \begin_layout Standard
9634 \begin_inset Tabular
9635 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9636 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9637 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9638 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9722 \begin_layout Standard
9723 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9730 \begin_layout Enumerate
9732 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9736 \begin_layout Enumerate
9740 \begin_layout Standard
9741 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9744 \begin_layout Enumerate
9749 \begin_layout Enumerate
9750 This is (a) and it's nested.
9754 \begin_layout Standard
9755 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9761 \begin_layout Standard
9763 \begin_inset Tabular
9764 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9765 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9766 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9767 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9851 \begin_layout Standard
9852 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9858 \begin_layout Enumerate
9865 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9868 \begin_layout Enumerate
9872 \begin_layout Standard
9873 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9877 \begin_layout Standard
9878 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9881 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9884 \begin_layout Enumerate
9889 \begin_layout Enumerate
9890 This is (a) and it's nested.
9893 \begin_layout Standard
9894 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9900 \begin_layout Standard
9902 \begin_inset Tabular
9903 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9904 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9905 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9906 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9991 \begin_layout Standard
9992 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9998 \begin_layout Enumerate
10000 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
10007 \begin_layout Enumerate
10011 \begin_layout Standard
10012 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
10018 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
10019 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
10023 \begin_layout Subsection
10024 Usage and General Features
10027 \begin_layout Standard
10028 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10029 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
10031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10038 is the innermost possible depth.
10039 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
10042 \begin_layout Enumerate
10043 level #1 – outermost
10047 \begin_layout Enumerate
10052 \begin_layout Enumerate
10057 \begin_layout Enumerate
10062 \begin_layout Itemize
10067 \begin_layout Itemize
10076 \begin_layout Standard
10077 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
10078 both of them in the example.
10079 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
10089 For example, if we tried to nest another
10094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10101 , we would get errors.
10104 \begin_layout Subsection
10106 \begin_inset Index idx
10109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10118 \begin_layout Standard
10119 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
10120 We have several examples of nested environments.
10121 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
10125 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10126 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
10129 \begin_layout Labeling
10130 \labelwidthstring MMM
10131 #1-a This is the outermost level.
10140 \begin_layout Labeling
10141 \labelwidthstring MMM
10142 #2-a This is level #2.
10143 We created it by using
10146 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10152 arg "depth-increment"
10159 \begin_layout Labeling
10160 \labelwidthstring MMM
10161 #3-a This is level #3.
10162 This time, we just enter
10169 arg "depth-increment"
10173 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
10177 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10183 arg "depth-increment"
10190 \begin_layout Standard
10195 environment, nested inside of
10196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10204 So, it's at level #4.
10205 We did this by entering
10208 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10214 arg "depth-increment"
10217 , then changing the paragraph environment to
10222 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
10238 \begin_layout Standard
10243 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
10246 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10252 \begin_layout Labeling
10253 \labelwidthstring MMM
10254 #4-a This is level #4.
10258 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10261 and changed the paragraph environment back to
10266 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
10270 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
10275 keep nesting things inside
10276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10287 \begin_layout Labeling
10288 \labelwidthstring MMM
10289 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10294 \begin_layout Labeling
10295 \labelwidthstring MMM
10296 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10297 and this is level #6.
10298 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10302 \begin_layout Labeling
10303 \labelwidthstring MMM
10304 #5-b Back to level #5.
10308 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10314 arg "depth-decrement"
10321 \begin_layout Labeling
10322 \labelwidthstring MMM
10326 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10332 arg "depth-decrement"
10335 , we're back at level #4.
10339 \begin_layout Labeling
10340 \labelwidthstring MMM
10341 #3-b Back to level #3.
10342 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10346 \begin_layout Labeling
10347 \labelwidthstring MMM
10348 #2-b Back to level #2.
10352 \begin_layout Labeling
10353 \labelwidthstring MMM
10354 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10355 After this sentence, we will enter
10359 and change the paragraph environment back to
10366 \begin_layout Standard
10367 We could have also used the
10383 environment in place of the
10388 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10391 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10392 Example 2: Inheritance
10395 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10396 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
10399 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10408 arg "depth-increment"
10412 \begin_inset Newline newline
10415 which, we will change to the
10423 \begin_layout Enumerate
10428 environment, at level #2.
10431 \begin_layout Enumerate
10432 Notice how the nested
10436 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10440 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
10444 \begin_layout Standard
10445 We ended this example by entering
10450 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10454 and reset the nesting depth by using
10457 arg "depth-decrement"
10463 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10464 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
10473 \begin_inset Argument 1
10476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10477 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10485 \begin_layout Enumerate
10486 This is level #1, in an
10490 paragraph environment.
10491 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10495 \begin_layout Enumerate
10500 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10506 arg "depth-increment"
10510 Now, what happens if we nest an
10514 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10515 label be? An asterisk?
10519 \begin_layout Itemize
10529 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10530 So, its label is a bullet.
10531 (We got here by using
10534 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10540 arg "depth-increment"
10543 , then changing the environment to
10551 \begin_layout Itemize
10552 Here's level #4, produced using
10555 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10561 arg "depth-increment"
10565 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10570 \begin_layout Enumerate
10572 to get to level #5.
10573 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10578 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10582 , because we are in the
10590 environment (that is, it is an
10605 \begin_layout Enumerate
10610 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10611 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10615 \begin_layout Enumerate
10616 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10619 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10622 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10625 \begin_layout Enumerate
10629 arg "depth-decrement"
10632 to decrease the depth after the next
10635 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10642 \begin_layout Enumerate
10644 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10649 \begin_layout Enumerate
10651 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10652 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10656 \begin_layout Enumerate
10657 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10666 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10671 reset the counter for the label.
10675 \begin_layout Enumerate
10679 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10685 arg "depth-decrement"
10688 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10689 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10690 into the twofold-nested
10698 \begin_layout Enumerate
10699 The same thing happens if we do another
10702 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10708 arg "depth-decrement"
10711 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10714 \begin_layout Standard
10715 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10720 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10731 The number of other
10735 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10742 The same rule applies for the
10746 environment, as well.
10749 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10750 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10753 \begin_layout Enumerate
10754 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10755 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10756 the same detail with how we did it.
10765 \begin_layout Standard
10773 arg "depth-increment"
10780 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10781 the example in parentheses someplace.
10782 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10783 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10784 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10788 \begin_layout Enumerate
10793 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10797 \begin_layout Verse
10798 Now we will add verse.
10799 \begin_inset Newline newline
10802 It will get much worse.
10803 \begin_inset Newline newline
10813 arg "depth-increment"
10823 \begin_layout Verse
10824 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10825 \begin_inset Newline newline
10828 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10829 \begin_inset Newline newline
10835 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10843 \begin_layout Verse
10844 Here comes a table:
10848 \begin_layout Standard
10849 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10855 \begin_layout Standard
10857 \begin_inset Tabular
10858 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10859 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10860 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10861 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10946 \begin_layout Verse
10950 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10960 arg "depth-increment"
10966 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10972 \begin_inset Newline newline
10980 arg "depth-decrement"
10987 \begin_layout Enumerate
10992 : level #1) This is another item.
10993 Note that selecting a
10997 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10998 3 times to put the table inside the
11005 \begin_layout Quotation
11006 We're now ending the
11010 list and changing to
11015 We're still at level #1.
11016 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
11017 The next set of paragraphs is a
11018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11025 We will nest both the
11032 \begin_inset space ~
11037 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
11041 for the letter body.
11045 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11048 to preserve the depth.
11049 Remember that you need to use
11052 arg "newline-insert newline"
11055 to create multiple lines inside the
11062 \begin_inset space ~
11072 \begin_layout Right Address
11074 \begin_inset Newline newline
11077 Moosegroin, MT 00100
11078 \begin_inset Newline newline
11084 \begin_layout Address
11086 \begin_inset space ~
11092 \begin_layout Quotation
11093 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
11094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11097 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
11098 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
11099 a backlog in our orders for methane.
11100 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
11101 as soon as possible.
11102 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
11105 \begin_layout Quotation
11106 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
11107 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
11108 with your order, along with payment.
11111 \begin_layout Quotation
11112 We thank you again for your patience.
11115 \begin_layout Address
11117 \begin_inset Newline newline
11124 \begin_layout Quotation
11125 That ends that example!
11128 \begin_layout Standard
11129 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
11130 gives you a lot of power with just
11132 We could have easily nested an
11153 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
11156 \begin_layout Subsection
11158 \begin_inset Index idx
11161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11162 Nesting ! Separation
11168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11170 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
11177 \begin_layout Standard
11178 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
11180 For example you need two different enumerations:
11183 \begin_layout Enumerate
11188 \begin_layout Enumerate
11193 \begin_layout Enumerate
11197 \begin_layout Standard
11198 \begin_inset Separator plain
11204 \begin_layout Itemize
11210 \begin_layout Standard
11211 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
11217 \begin_layout Enumerate
11221 \begin_layout Enumerate
11225 \begin_layout Enumerate
11229 \begin_layout Standard
11230 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
11231 list item and use the menu
11233 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11234 Separated <Name> Above
11238 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11239 Separated <Name> Below
11242 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
11243 ) and before or behind it the
11245 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
11248 \begin_layout Standard
11249 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
11250 (red arrow in LyX).
11251 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
11252 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
11255 \begin_layout Standard
11256 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
11259 arg "paragraph-break"
11266 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
11269 \begin_layout Section
11270 Spacing, Pagination and Line Breaks
11271 \begin_inset Index idx
11274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11283 \begin_layout Standard
11284 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
11285 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
11287 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
11288 be broken at the end of a line.
11289 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
11293 \begin_layout Subsection
11295 \change_deleted 177693 1654619480
11297 \change_inserted 177693 1654619480
11301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11303 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11308 \begin_inset Index idx
11311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11313 \change_deleted 177693 1654619483
11315 \change_inserted 177693 1654619483
11326 \begin_layout Standard
11328 \change_deleted 177693 1654619488
11330 \change_inserted 177693 1654619490
11333 space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11334 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11336 \change_inserted 177693 1654619513
11339 break the line at that point.
11340 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11343 \begin_layout Quote
11344 Further documentation is given in section
11345 \begin_inset Newline newline
11349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11351 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11358 \begin_layout Standard
11359 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a
11360 \change_deleted 177693 1654619535
11362 \change_inserted 177693 1654619537
11366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11380 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11390 \change_deleted 177693 1654619542
11392 \change_inserted 177693 1654619544
11397 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11398 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11400 \change_deleted 177693 1654619548
11402 \change_inserted 177693 1654619548
11406 \begin_inset space ~
11414 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11420 \begin_layout Subsection
11422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11424 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11429 \begin_inset Index idx
11432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11433 Spacing ! Horizontal
11441 \begin_layout Standard
11442 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11444 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11445 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11449 The length units are listed in Appendix
11450 \begin_inset space ~
11454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11456 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11463 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11465 \change_deleted 177693 1654667894
11467 \change_inserted 177693 1654667898
11471 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
11473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11475 name "subsec:Normal-Space"
11480 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
11482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11484 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11491 \begin_inset Index idx
11494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11496 \change_deleted 177693 1654667939
11498 \change_inserted 177693 1654667939
11509 \begin_layout Standard
11510 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11511 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11512 at the ends of sentences.
11513 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11514 automatically takes care about this.
11515 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11516 followed by a period; see section
11517 \begin_inset space ~
11521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11523 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11528 To insert a normal space, select
11530 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11531 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11533 \change_deleted 177693 1654667953
11535 \change_inserted 177693 1654667953
11539 \begin_inset space ~
11547 arg "space-insert normal"
11553 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11555 \change_inserted 177693 1654668020
11559 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11561 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11566 \begin_inset Index idx
11569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11578 \begin_layout Standard
11580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11584 \change_inserted 177693 1654668039
11588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11591 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11596 \change_deleted 177693 1654619681
11598 \change_inserted 177693 1654619683
11602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11606 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11607 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11608 inside abbreviations:
11611 \begin_layout Quote
11613 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11617 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11620 \begin_layout Standard
11621 or between values and units.
11622 Compare for example this:
11623 \begin_inset Newline newline
11627 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11631 \begin_inset Newline newline
11634 10 kg (normal space
11635 \change_inserted 177693 1654668105
11641 \begin_layout Standard
11642 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11644 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11645 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11647 \change_inserted 177693 1654668120
11649 \begin_inset space ~
11655 \begin_inset space ~
11663 arg "space-insert thin"
11669 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11673 \begin_layout Standard
11674 You can also insert the following space types:
11677 \begin_layout Description
11679 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11681 \begin_inset space ~
11687 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11691 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11695 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11699 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11701 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11704 space between the arrows.
11705 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11709 \begin_layout Description
11711 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11713 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11717 \begin_inset space ~
11720 space A line with a
11721 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11725 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11729 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11733 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11735 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11738 space between the arrows.
11741 \begin_layout Description
11743 \begin_inset space ~
11747 \begin_inset space ~
11750 space A line with a
11751 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11755 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11759 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11762 negative thin space between the arrows.
11765 \begin_layout Description
11767 \begin_inset space ~
11771 \begin_inset space ~
11774 space A line with a
11775 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11779 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11783 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11786 negative medium space between the arrows.
11789 \begin_layout Description
11791 \begin_inset space ~
11795 \begin_inset space ~
11798 space A line with a
11799 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11803 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11807 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11810 negative thick space between the arrows.
11813 \begin_layout Description
11815 \change_deleted 177693 1654668288
11817 \change_inserted 177693 1654668297
11819 \begin_inset space ~
11825 \begin_inset space ~
11829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11833 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11837 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11841 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11845 \change_deleted 177693 1654668308
11847 \change_inserted 177693 1654668324
11849 \begin_inset space ~
11855 \begin_inset space ~
11859 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11862 em) space between the arrows.
11865 \begin_layout Description
11867 \begin_inset space ~
11871 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11875 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11879 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11883 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11887 \change_deleted 177693 1654668332
11889 \change_inserted 177693 1654668332
11893 \begin_inset space ~
11897 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11900 em) space between the arrows.
11903 \begin_layout Description
11905 \change_deleted 177693 1654668340
11907 \change_inserted 177693 1654668345
11909 \begin_inset space ~
11915 \begin_inset space ~
11919 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11923 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11927 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11931 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11935 \change_deleted 177693 1654668349
11937 \change_inserted 177693 1654668352
11939 \begin_inset space ~
11943 \change_deleted 177693 1654668352
11947 \begin_inset space ~
11951 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11954 em) space between the arrows.
11957 \begin_layout Description
11959 \begin_inset space ~
11963 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11967 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11972 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11976 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11979 cm space between the arrows.
11982 \begin_layout Standard
11984 \begin_inset space ~
11988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11990 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11994 lists the different space sizes.
11997 \begin_layout Standard
11998 \begin_inset Float table
12005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12006 \begin_inset Caption Standard
12008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12011 name "tab:Width-of-the"
12015 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
12023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12025 \begin_inset Tabular
12026 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
12027 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
12028 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
12029 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
12031 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12042 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12055 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12064 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12069 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12079 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12084 \change_deleted 177693 1654619715
12086 \change_inserted 177693 1654621248
12087 Non-breaking Normal
12094 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12099 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12109 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12118 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12123 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12127 \change_inserted 177693 1654620497
12129 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
12133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12144 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
12145 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12150 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
12156 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12161 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
12163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12172 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
12173 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12178 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
12184 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12189 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
12191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12201 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12210 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12215 \change_deleted 177693 1654620640
12217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12221 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
12227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12237 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12246 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12261 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12270 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12285 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12290 \change_deleted 177693 1654620687
12292 \change_inserted 177693 1654620689
12296 \change_deleted 177693 1654620678
12298 \change_inserted 177693 1654620679
12302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12310 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12315 \change_deleted 177693 1654620674
12317 \change_inserted 177693 1654620676
12321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12325 \change_inserted 177693 1654620708
12327 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
12331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12343 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12348 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12356 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12371 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12376 \change_deleted 177693 1654668383
12378 \change_inserted 177693 1654668384
12382 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12390 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12416 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12418 \begin_inset Index idx
12421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12430 \begin_layout Standard
12431 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
12432 feature for adding extra space
12433 in a uniform fashion.
12435 \change_inserted 177693 1654621642
12438 Fill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals the
12439 remaining space between the left and right margins.
12440 If there is more than one H
12441 \change_inserted 177693 1654621633
12444 Fill on a line, they divide the available space equally between themselves.
12447 \begin_layout Standard
12448 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
12451 \begin_layout Quote
12453 This is on the left side
12454 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12457 This is on the right
12460 \begin_layout Quote
12463 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12467 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12473 \begin_layout Quote
12476 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12480 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12484 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12490 \begin_layout Standard
12491 That was an example in the
12497 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12501 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12505 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12508 is one in a standard paragraph.
12509 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
12513 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12516 \begin_layout Standard
12518 \change_deleted 177693 1654621654
12520 \change_inserted 177693 1654621654
12523 s can be made visible when you choose one of the
12526 \begin_inset space ~
12531 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
12534 \begin_layout Standard
12536 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12540 \begin_inset space ~
12546 \begin_layout Standard
12548 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12552 \begin_inset space ~
12558 \begin_layout Standard
12560 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12564 \begin_inset space ~
12570 \begin_layout Standard
12572 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12576 \begin_inset space ~
12582 \begin_layout Standard
12584 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
12586 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
12590 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
12591 (= opened downwards)
12594 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12598 \begin_inset space ~
12604 \begin_layout Standard
12606 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
12608 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
12612 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
12616 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12620 \begin_inset space ~
12626 \begin_layout Standard
12627 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12636 \change_deleted 177693 1654621656
12638 \change_inserted 177693 1654621656
12641 is at the beginning of a line, and
12645 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
12648 \change_deleted 177693 1654621657
12650 \change_inserted 177693 1654621657
12653 s from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12654 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
12655 \change_deleted 177693 1654668432
12659 \change_inserted 177693 1654668434
12664 option in the space dialog.
12672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12674 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12676 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12681 \begin_inset Index idx
12684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12693 \begin_layout Standard
12694 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12695 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12698 \begin_layout Standard
12699 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12702 What is correct English?:
12703 \begin_inset Newline newline
12707 \begin_inset Newline newline
12711 \begin_inset space ~
12714 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12715 \begin_inset Newline newline
12719 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12730 \begin_inset Newline newline
12734 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12745 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12751 \begin_layout Standard
12753 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12758 \begin_inset space ~
12762 \begin_inset space ~
12766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12770 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12772 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12773 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12777 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12783 \begin_inset space ~
12787 \begin_inset space ~
12791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12794 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12803 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12804 That is why it is named
12805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12813 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12814 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12818 \begin_layout Subsection
12820 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12822 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12827 \begin_inset Index idx
12830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12839 \begin_layout Standard
12840 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12842 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12843 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12845 \begin_inset space ~
12851 There you find the following sizes:
12854 \begin_layout Standard
12858 \change_inserted 177693 1654621302
12866 \change_inserted 177693 1654621304
12874 \change_inserted 177693 1654621306
12879 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12880 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12884 \change_inserted 177693 1654621298
12889 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12891 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12892 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12894 \begin_inset space ~
12900 \begin_inset Index idx
12903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12904 Document ! Settings
12909 for the paragraph separation.
12910 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12913 \change_inserted 177693 1654621292
12921 \change_inserted 177693 1654621294
12927 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12931 \begin_layout Standard
12933 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12942 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12943 size including line spacing.
12948 \begin_layout Standard
12952 \change_inserted 177693 1654621333
12958 \begin_inset Index idx
12961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12967 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12968 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12973 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12974 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12978 \change_inserted 177693 1654621321
12986 \change_inserted 177693 1654621325
12991 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12999 \change_inserted 177693 1654621587
13004 s are described in section
13005 \begin_inset space ~
13009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13011 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
13020 If there are several
13023 \change_inserted 177693 1654621344
13028 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
13029 You can therefore use
13032 \change_inserted 177693 1654621329
13037 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
13040 \begin_layout Standard
13045 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
13046 \begin_inset space ~
13050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13052 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
13059 \begin_layout Standard
13060 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13070 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
13071 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
13083 \begin_layout Subsection
13084 Paragraph Alignment
13085 \begin_inset Index idx
13088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13089 Paragraph ! Alignment
13097 \begin_layout Standard
13098 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
13100 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13103 dialog (toolbar button
13106 arg "layout-paragraph"
13110 There are five possibilities:
13113 \begin_layout Itemize
13121 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
13127 \begin_layout Itemize
13135 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
13141 \begin_layout Itemize
13149 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
13155 \begin_layout Itemize
13163 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
13169 \begin_layout Itemize
13177 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
13183 \begin_layout Standard
13184 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
13185 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
13186 the left and right margins.
13187 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
13190 \begin_layout Standard
13192 This paragraph is right aligned,
13195 \begin_layout Standard
13197 this one is centered,
13200 \begin_layout Standard
13202 this one is left aligned.
13205 \begin_layout Subsection
13207 \begin_inset Index idx
13210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13211 Page breaks ! Forced
13217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13219 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
13226 \begin_layout Standard
13227 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
13228 does the page breaks in your document, you can
13229 force a page break where you want one.
13230 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
13231 is good at page breaking.
13232 Only if you use a lot of
13236 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
13237 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
13240 \begin_layout Standard
13241 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
13242 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
13246 have to change the page breaking.
13249 \begin_layout Standard
13250 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
13252 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
13254 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13255 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13257 \begin_inset space ~
13263 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
13265 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13266 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13268 \begin_inset space ~
13273 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
13275 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
13276 on which only the last few lines are absent.
13279 \begin_layout Standard
13280 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
13281 at the top of a page.
13282 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
13284 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
13285 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
13286 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
13288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13290 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
13294 to learn more about
13301 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13303 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13305 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
13310 \begin_inset Index idx
13313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13314 Page breaks ! Clear
13322 \begin_layout Standard
13323 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
13324 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
13325 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
13326 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
13327 it, if necessary by adding pages.
13330 \begin_layout Standard
13331 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
13333 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13334 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13336 \begin_inset space ~
13342 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
13344 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13345 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13347 \begin_inset space ~
13351 \begin_inset space ~
13356 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
13357 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
13358 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
13362 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13364 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
13365 Suppressing Page Breaks
13368 \begin_inset Index idx
13371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13373 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
13377 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706335
13386 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005685
13388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13390 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
13395 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
13399 \begin_layout Standard
13401 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
13402 To discourage page break at
13403 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005668
13405 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
13406 certain point you can use
13410 \SpecialChar menuseparator
13412 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
13415 \SpecialChar menuseparator
13417 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
13424 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
13425 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when
13426 you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case
13427 using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
13432 \begin_layout Subsection
13434 \begin_inset Index idx
13437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13444 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13446 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
13453 \begin_layout Standard
13454 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
13456 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
13458 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13459 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13461 \begin_inset space ~
13465 \begin_inset space ~
13473 arg "newline-insert newline"
13477 Another type that is inserted via the menu
13479 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13480 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13482 \begin_inset space ~
13486 \begin_inset space ~
13494 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
13497 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
13499 This is useful to avoid
13500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13507 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
13510 \begin_layout Standard
13511 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
13512 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
13514 very good at line breaking.
13515 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
13516 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
13517 \begin_inset space ~
13521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13523 reference "sec:Quote"
13528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13530 reference "sec:Verse"
13535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13537 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
13544 \begin_layout Subsection
13546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13548 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
13553 \begin_inset Index idx
13556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13565 \begin_layout Standard
13567 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13578 \begin_layout Standard
13582 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13583 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13585 \begin_inset space ~
13590 you can insert horizontal lines.
13591 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
13592 of the current text line or the paragraph.
13593 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
13596 \begin_layout Standard
13598 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13609 \begin_layout Section
13610 Characters and Symbols
13613 \begin_layout Standard
13614 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
13615 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
13616 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
13618 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13624 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
13628 for information on how this is done.
13631 \begin_layout Standard
13632 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
13637 dialog via the menu
13639 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13640 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
13646 \begin_layout Standard
13647 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13655 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
13656 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13658 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13666 \begin_layout Section
13667 Fonts and Text Styles
13668 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13670 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13677 \begin_layout Subsection
13679 \begin_inset Index idx
13682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13691 \begin_layout Standard
13692 There are two types of fonts:
13695 \begin_layout Description
13697 \begin_inset space ~
13701 \begin_inset Index idx
13704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13710 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13711 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13715 characters) in the font.
13716 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
13717 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13718 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
13719 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13720 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13721 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
13722 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13723 \begin_inset Newline newline
13726 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13727 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
13728 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
13729 sizes than at small ones.
13730 \begin_inset Newline newline
13744 \begin_inset space ~
13752 \begin_layout Description
13754 \begin_inset space ~
13758 \begin_inset Index idx
13761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13767 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
13768 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13769 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
13770 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13771 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
13772 image manipulation program.
13773 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
13774 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13775 \begin_inset space ~
13778 pixels high up to 34
13779 \begin_inset space ~
13782 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13783 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
13784 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
13786 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13787 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13788 \begin_inset Newline newline
13791 Bitmap fonts are named
13794 \begin_inset space ~
13799 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13802 \begin_layout Standard
13803 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13804 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13805 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13806 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13807 use scalable fonts.
13810 \begin_layout Standard
13811 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13814 \begin_layout Standard
13815 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13817 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
13819 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
13822 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13823 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13824 font, to emphasize text you use an
13825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13833 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13835 In \SpecialChar LyX
13836 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13840 \begin_layout Subsection
13843 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13845 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13852 \begin_layout Standard
13853 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13854 used its own fonts.
13855 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13856 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13859 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13860 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13861 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13862 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13863 to a word processor.
13864 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13865 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13866 files are very portable across
13867 different machines.
13868 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13869 has increased a lot
13870 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13873 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13875 \begin_inset space ~
13879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13881 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13886 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13887 code in the document
13888 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13891 \begin_layout Standard
13892 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13893 engines that are also able directly
13894 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13896 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13898 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13900 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13901 that is installed on your system.
13902 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13905 \begin_layout Standard
13906 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13914 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13915 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13923 \begin_layout Subsection
13924 Document Font and Font size
13925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13927 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13932 \begin_inset Index idx
13935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13942 \begin_inset Index idx
13945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13954 \begin_layout Standard
13955 You can set the document fonts in the
13957 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13961 \begin_inset Index idx
13964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13965 Document ! Settings
13975 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13976 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13979 \begin_inset space ~
13988 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13990 \begin_inset space ~
13993 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13996 \begin_layout Standard
14001 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
14002 This requires that you use
14014 as the output format, i.
14015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14019 \begin_inset space \space{}
14022 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
14023 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14024 installed (see section
14025 \begin_inset space ~
14029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14031 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14036 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
14038 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
14039 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
14041 \begin_inset space ~
14044 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
14045 cannot determine the family.
14046 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
14047 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
14050 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
14053 \begin_layout Standard
14054 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
14055 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
14060 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
14066 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
14068 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
14070 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
14073 font encoding, this is
14074 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
14075 , depending on the document language,
14078 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
14079 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
14081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14087 \begin_inset space ~
14093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14103 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
14104 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
14106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14112 \begin_inset space ~
14118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14126 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
14130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14147 European Computer Modern
14150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14158 However, some classes set different default fonts.
14161 \begin_layout Standard
14166 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
14167 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
14171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14172 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
14175 \begin_inset space ~
14180 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
14186 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
14187 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
14190 \begin_layout Itemize
14194 \begin_inset space ~
14199 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
14212 \begin_inset space ~
14217 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14218 community in order to replace
14222 as the default font.
14223 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
14224 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
14227 \begin_inset space ~
14240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14241 One difference is improved kerning.
14249 \begin_layout Itemize
14250 If you do not like the look of
14258 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
14259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14263 \begin_inset space ~
14269 \begin_inset space ~
14279 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
14280 \begin_inset space ~
14283 serif and typewriter fonts,
14287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14288 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
14289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14295 \begin_inset space ~
14304 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
14305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14309 \begin_inset space \space{}
14317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14321 \begin_inset space \space{}
14327 \begin_inset space ~
14335 \begin_inset space ~
14345 but you can also select your own.
14346 \begin_inset Newline newline
14349 The differences between roman,
14352 \begin_inset space ~
14361 fonts are explained in section
14362 \begin_inset space ~
14366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14368 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14373 \begin_inset Newline newline
14379 \begin_inset space ~
14384 was originally designed for newspapers.
14385 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
14386 into the small newspaper columns.
14390 \begin_inset space ~
14395 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
14398 \begin_layout Standard
14399 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
14412 Some classes provide additional sizes.
14417 depends on the class you are using.
14418 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
14421 \begin_layout Standard
14422 Note that the font size is the
14427 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
14428 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
14429 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
14430 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
14433 \begin_inset space ~
14439 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
14440 \begin_inset space ~
14444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14446 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14453 \begin_layout Standard
14457 \begin_inset space ~
14462 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
14464 \begin_inset space ~
14467 serif or typewriter.
14472 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
14482 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
14485 \begin_layout Standard
14490 LaTeX font encoding
14492 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
14493 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14499 \begin_inset Index idx
14502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14510 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
14512 \begin_inset space ~
14516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14518 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
14525 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
14526 Unless you have specific reasons, use
14527 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
14531 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
14539 \begin_layout Standard
14540 With some fonts, the checkboxes
14542 Use Old Style Figures
14546 Use True Small Caps
14549 These are extra features some fonts provide.
14552 Use Old Style Figures
14554 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
14556 Old style figures are the numerals (0
14557 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14561 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14564 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
14568 Use True Small Caps
14570 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
14571 of scaled capitals.
14572 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
14573 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
14574 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
14578 \begin_layout Standard
14580 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
14581 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
14582 provided by the font package (or the
14586 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
14591 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
14597 \begin_layout Standard
14602 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
14603 a font to display the script characters.
14607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14608 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14614 \begin_inset Index idx
14617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14624 So this has no effect for the document language
14640 \begin_layout Standard
14643 Enable micro-typographic extensions
14645 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
14646 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14652 \begin_inset Index idx
14655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14657 packages ! microtype
14666 \begin_layout Standard
14669 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14671 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14676 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14677 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14683 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
14684 \begin_inset space ~
14688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14690 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14700 \begin_layout Standard
14701 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14705 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14713 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
14718 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14719 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14721 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14723 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14726 dialog, see section
14727 \begin_inset space ~
14731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14733 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14745 \begin_layout Subsection
14749 \begin_layout Standard
14750 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14751 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
14753 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14754 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
14755 choose a math font in the dialog
14757 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14761 \begin_inset Index idx
14764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14765 Document ! Settings
14771 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14772 automatically selects a math font.
14773 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14774 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14783 \begin_inset space ~
14789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14794 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14795 document font is available.
14798 \begin_layout Standard
14799 Note that the math font will not be used for
14803 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14809 or by the insertion of the command
14816 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14817 \begin_inset space ~
14821 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14822 while the math characters do not.
14824 \begin_inset space ~
14827 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14830 \begin_inset space ~
14838 \begin_inset space ~
14843 in the document font settings.
14846 \begin_layout Standard
14847 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14848 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14849 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14850 font (in most cases
14851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14857 \begin_inset space ~
14863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14866 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14867 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14875 \begin_inset space ~
14881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14887 \begin_layout Subsection
14889 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14891 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14895 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14899 name "subsec:charstyles"
14906 \begin_inset Index idx
14909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14916 \begin_inset Index idx
14919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14928 \begin_layout Standard
14929 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14930 automatically changes the
14931 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14934 style for certain paragraph environments.
14936 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14937 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14939 This is where we meet the concept of
14945 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14947 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14951 \begin_layout Standard
14953 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14958 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14960 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14973 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14982 e., available with all document classes.
14983 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14987 for specific purposes.
14988 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14991 \begin_layout Standard
14993 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14994 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
15004 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
15008 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
15009 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15021 — you customized the
15026 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
15027 among them, encourage the use of
15039 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
15040 \begin_inset space ~
15044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15046 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15051 Rather than fiddling with
15055 , they encourage the use of
15059 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
15060 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15064 \begin_inset Quotes els
15068 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15071 ), not their form (
15072 \begin_inset Quotes els
15076 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15080 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
15081 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
15082 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
15083 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
15084 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
15085 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
15091 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
15092 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15095 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
15096 With a semantic markup (such as
15100 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
15105 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15107 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
15108 of a document, using different markup semantics.
15111 \begin_layout Standard
15113 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
15114 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
15115 by \SpecialChar LyX
15121 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15123 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
15124 Builtin Text Styles
15125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15127 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
15134 \begin_layout Standard
15136 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
15137 The two builtin text styles can be
15138 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
15142 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
15146 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
15147 both of these styles
15150 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
15154 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006132
15156 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006135
15158 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
15164 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
15170 \begin_layout Standard
15175 style, do one of the following:
15178 \begin_layout Itemize
15179 click on the toolbar button
15188 \begin_layout Itemize
15189 use the key binding
15196 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
15200 \begin_layout Itemize
15202 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
15206 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006154
15208 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006157
15210 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
15218 arg "dialog-show character"
15222 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
15226 arg "dialog-show character"
15230 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006237
15231 as described in section
15232 \begin_inset space ~
15236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15238 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15243 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006263
15253 \begin_layout Standard
15255 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006284
15257 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006284
15261 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006286
15265 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006290
15267 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006291
15271 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006296
15279 style is already active, they deactivate it.
15282 \begin_layout Standard
15283 One typically uses the
15287 style for proper names.
15289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15296 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
15298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15302 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
15306 \begin_layout Standard
15308 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
15313 is producing text in
15317 , but the definition can be changed.
15322 \begin_layout Standard
15324 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
15326 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
15334 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
15341 \begin_layout Itemize
15342 clicking on the toolbar button
15351 \begin_layout Itemize
15352 using the keybindings
15359 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
15363 \begin_layout Itemize
15365 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
15369 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006353
15371 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006356
15373 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
15381 arg "dialog-show character"
15385 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
15389 arg "dialog-show character"
15393 \change_deleted 630872221 1621007331
15394 as described in section
15395 \begin_inset space ~
15399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15401 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15406 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006374
15416 \begin_layout Standard
15421 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
15423 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
15425 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
15428 packages use a different font
15429 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
15430 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15436 \begin_layout Standard
15437 We've been using the
15441 style all over the place in this document.
15442 Here's one more example:
15445 \begin_layout Quotation
15449 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
15451 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
15457 \begin_layout Standard
15458 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
15459 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
15460 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
15461 the common tendency to overuse
15462 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
15464 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
15469 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
15471 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
15475 \begin_layout Standard
15477 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
15478 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
15479 only as font changes and integrated in the
15487 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
15490 always reset to the default font using the key binding
15497 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
15499 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
15503 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
15506 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15508 \begin_inset space ~
15511 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15513 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15523 arg "dialog-show character"
15529 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15531 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
15537 arg "dialog-show character"
15541 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15545 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15547 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
15549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15551 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
15558 \begin_layout Standard
15560 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
15561 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
15563 \begin_inset space ~
15567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15569 reference "subsec:Modules"
15576 ), or local layout settings (see section
15577 \begin_inset space ~
15581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15583 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
15588 As the two builtin styles, they provide
15592 markup for specific functions.
15593 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
15598 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
15608 \begin_inset Quotes els
15612 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15618 \begin_layout Standard
15620 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
15621 These styles can be found, if available, in the
15623 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15625 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006495
15627 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
15633 \begin_layout Standard
15635 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
15636 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
15641 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
15642 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
15643 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
15648 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
15649 \begin_inset Flex Emph
15652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15654 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
15662 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
15663 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
15664 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
15665 \begin_inset Flex Code
15668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15670 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
15679 \begin_inset Flex Strong
15682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15684 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
15693 \begin_inset Flex Noun
15696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15698 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
15707 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
15708 on screen their formal appearance.
15713 \begin_layout Subsection
15715 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
15717 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
15721 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
15727 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
15729 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
15735 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
15737 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
15741 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15743 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15748 \begin_inset Index idx
15751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15760 \begin_layout Standard
15761 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
15762 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
15765 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
15767 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
15769 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
15773 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
15774 the properties of text passages
15775 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
15779 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
15780 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15781 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
15782 from ordinary dialog.
15783 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
15787 \begin_layout Standard
15789 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
15790 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
15791 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
15792 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
15793 the properties of the respective text passages.
15798 comes in as a last resort.
15803 \begin_layout Standard
15804 Before we document how to
15805 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
15806 use custom character style
15807 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
15808 tweak the text properties
15810 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
15811 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
15813 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
15817 \begin_inset Newline newline
15820 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
15821 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15824 \begin_layout Standard
15826 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
15827 use custom character styles
15828 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
15829 tweak text properties
15832 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
15835 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15837 \begin_inset space ~
15840 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15848 arg "dialog-show character"
15851 dialog or press the toolbar button
15854 arg "dialog-show character"
15859 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
15862 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
15863 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
15865 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
15868 property that you can choose.
15869 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
15872 \begin_inset space ~
15877 , which keeps the current state of that property.
15879 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
15883 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
15885 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
15890 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15891 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15892 environments all at once.
15895 \begin_layout Standard
15897 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
15899 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006625
15903 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006625
15905 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
15909 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006629
15911 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006628
15916 , and their options (in addition to
15919 \begin_inset space ~
15925 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
15929 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
15937 \begin_layout Labeling
15938 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15952 The possible options are:
15956 \begin_layout Labeling
15957 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15962 This is the Roman font family.
15963 Normally a serif font.
15964 It's also the default family.
15974 \begin_layout Labeling
15975 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15979 \begin_inset space ~
15986 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15998 \begin_layout Labeling
15999 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16006 This is the Typewriter font family.
16012 arg "font-typewriter"
16018 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
16022 \begin_layout Standard
16024 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
16025 The general differences of these families are:
16028 \begin_layout Itemize
16030 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
16035 fonts use characters with serifs.
16036 These are the small
16037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16044 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16045 The following example shows the difference:
16046 \begin_inset Newline newline
16050 \begin_inset Newline newline
16055 text without serifs
16058 \begin_inset Newline newline
16061 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16062 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16069 \begin_layout Itemize
16071 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
16076 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16077 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16078 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16081 \begin_layout Itemize
16083 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
16089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16096 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16114 \begin_inset Newline newline
16118 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16123 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
16136 \begin_inset Note Note
16139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16141 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
16142 For more on phantoms see section
16143 \begin_inset space ~
16147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16149 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16159 \begin_inset Newline newline
16168 \begin_layout Labeling
16169 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16174 This corresponds to the print weight.
16179 \begin_layout Labeling
16180 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16185 This is the Medium font series.
16186 It's also the default series.
16189 \begin_layout Labeling
16190 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16197 This is the Bold font series.
16210 \begin_layout Labeling
16211 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16216 As the name implies.
16221 \begin_layout Labeling
16222 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16227 This is the Upright font shape.
16228 It's also the default shape.
16231 \begin_layout Labeling
16232 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16242 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
16247 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
16252 s the Italic font shape
16258 \begin_layout Labeling
16259 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16266 This is the Slanted font shape
16268 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
16269 , this is different from italic).
16272 \begin_layout Labeling
16273 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16277 \begin_inset space ~
16284 This is the Small caps font shape
16291 \begin_layout Labeling
16292 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16294 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
16299 Alters the text color.
16300 Note that not all DVI
16301 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
16303 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
16304 viewers are able to display colors.
16308 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
16310 \begin_inset space ~
16314 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
16317 , which means that the document default color set in
16319 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16320 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16326 \begin_inset space ~
16332 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
16334 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
16336 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
16338 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
16416 \begin_inset Index idx
16419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16426 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
16432 \begin_layout Labeling
16433 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16435 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
16440 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
16441 the language of the document.
16442 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
16443 workarea in blue to
16444 indicate the change
16445 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
16446 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
16448 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
16450 \begin_inset Newline newline
16453 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
16455 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
16456 When using the spell checking (see section
16457 \begin_inset space ~
16461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16463 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
16467 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
16468 \begin_inset Newline newline
16471 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
16473 Exclude from Spellchecking
16476 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
16477 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
16481 \begin_layout Labeling
16482 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16487 Alters the size of the font.
16489 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
16491 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
16495 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
16498 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
16499 document font size.
16500 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
16501 the details, but a general description of what
16507 \begin_layout Labeling
16508 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16529 arg "font-size tiny"
16535 \begin_layout Labeling
16536 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16557 arg "font-size scriptsize"
16563 \begin_layout Labeling
16564 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16585 arg "font-size footnotesize"
16591 \begin_layout Labeling
16592 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16613 arg "font-size small"
16619 \begin_layout Labeling
16620 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16634 It's also the default size.
16638 arg "font-size normal"
16644 \begin_layout Labeling
16645 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16666 arg "font-size large"
16672 \begin_layout Labeling
16673 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16694 arg "font-size larger"
16700 \begin_layout Labeling
16701 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16722 arg "font-size largest"
16728 \begin_layout Labeling
16729 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16750 arg "font-size huge"
16756 \begin_layout Labeling
16757 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16778 arg "font-size giant"
16784 \begin_layout Labeling
16785 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16790 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
16791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16810 arg "font-size increase"
16816 \begin_layout Labeling
16817 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16822 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
16823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16842 arg "font-size decrease"
16848 \begin_layout Standard
16853 : don't go crazy with this feature.
16854 You should almost never need to change the font size.
16856 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
16857 — use those instead.
16858 This is here for fine-tuning only!
16859 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006744
16864 \begin_layout Standard
16866 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006776
16867 Another combo box allows to tweak
16874 \begin_layout Labeling
16875 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16877 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
16882 Alters the text color.
16883 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
16888 , which means that the document default color set in
16890 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16891 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16897 \begin_inset space ~
16902 is used, you can select
16979 \begin_inset Index idx
16982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16984 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
16997 \begin_layout Labeling
16998 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17000 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
17004 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
17010 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
17011 change a few other things at the character level
17012 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
17013 have text passages being underlined
17017 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
17018 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
17019 days, when you could not change fonts.
17020 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
17021 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
17022 because some people
17026 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
17033 \begin_layout Labeling
17034 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17036 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
17043 This is text with emphasize on
17046 This might seem like the same as
17050 , but it is actually a bit different.
17056 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
17058 Normally this font is equal to italic.
17059 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
17063 \begin_layout Labeling
17064 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17066 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
17071 Don't use underlining.
17076 \begin_layout Labeling
17077 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17079 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
17083 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
17091 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
17093 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
17102 arg "font-underline"
17108 \begin_inset Newline newline
17112 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
17115 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
17116 when you could not change fonts.
17117 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
17118 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
17119 because some people
17123 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
17128 \begin_layout Labeling
17129 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17133 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
17135 \begin_inset space ~
17144 This is text with Double under
17145 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
17147 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
17156 arg "font-underunderline"
17160 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
17162 \begin_inset Newline newline
17165 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
17166 about double underbar
17171 \begin_layout Labeling
17172 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17176 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
17178 \begin_inset space ~
17187 This is text with Wavy under
17188 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
17190 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
17199 arg "font-underwave"
17203 \begin_inset Newline newline
17206 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
17207 Keep antinausea pills handy.
17208 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
17213 \begin_layout Labeling
17214 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17216 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
17221 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
17227 \begin_layout Labeling
17228 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17230 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
17235 Don't use strikethrough.
17238 \begin_layout Labeling
17239 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17243 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
17245 \begin_inset space ~
17249 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
17257 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
17259 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
17260 Single strikethrough
17268 arg "font-strikeout"
17272 \begin_inset Newline newline
17275 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
17276 changed in the meantime.
17279 \begin_layout Labeling
17280 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17282 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
17286 \begin_inset space ~
17290 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
17292 \begin_inset space ~
17296 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
17304 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
17306 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
17312 \begin_inset Newline newline
17315 This is used to make text hardly readable.
17319 \begin_layout Standard
17321 \change_inserted 630872221 1621007597
17322 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
17325 \begin_layout Labeling
17326 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17328 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006898
17333 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
17334 the language of the document.
17335 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
17336 workarea in blue to
17337 indicate the change.
17338 \begin_inset Newline newline
17341 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
17343 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
17344 When using the spell checking (see section
17345 \begin_inset space ~
17349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17351 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
17355 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
17356 \begin_inset Newline newline
17359 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
17361 Exclude from Spellchecking
17364 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
17367 \begin_layout Standard
17369 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
17370 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
17371 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
17372 \begin_inset space ~
17376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17378 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
17383 \change_inserted 630872221 1621181776
17387 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
17393 \begin_layout Itemize
17395 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
17402 This is text with emphasize on
17407 \begin_layout Itemize
17411 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
17418 This is text with Noun on.
17420 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
17427 , this is a logical attribute.
17428 Normally it's equivalent to
17431 \begin_inset space ~
17441 \begin_layout Standard
17442 So you have a huge number of combinations to
17443 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
17445 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
17450 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
17451 chosen a new character style
17452 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
17453 applied a text property
17456 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
17459 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17461 \begin_inset space ~
17464 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17472 arg "dialog-show character"
17478 arg "dialog-show character"
17481 ) dialog, the settings are
17482 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
17486 You can activate the
17487 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
17489 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
17490 last applied properties
17492 by using the toolbar button
17495 arg "textstyle-apply"
17499 The button lets you apply
17500 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
17501 your custom character style
17502 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
17505 even when the dialog isn't visible.
17507 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
17508 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
17509 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
17510 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
17515 \begin_layout Standard
17516 To completely reset the
17517 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
17519 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
17520 text properties of a selection
17522 to the default, use
17523 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
17525 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
17535 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
17540 from the menu of the toolbar button
17543 arg "textstyle-apply"
17550 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
17551 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
17552 you just set the shape to
17553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17571 \begin_inset space ~
17585 \begin_layout Standard
17587 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17588 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
17596 \begin_inset space ~
17608 \begin_layout Itemize
17610 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17623 font, which means every character has the same width; the
17624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17641 \begin_inset Newline newline
17645 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
17648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17659 \begin_inset Note Note
17662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17663 For more on phantoms see section
17664 \begin_inset space ~
17668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17670 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
17680 \begin_inset Newline newline
17686 \begin_layout Itemize
17688 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17693 fonts use characters with serifs.
17694 These are the small
17695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17702 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
17703 The following example shows the difference:
17704 \begin_inset Newline newline
17708 \begin_inset Newline newline
17713 text without serifs
17716 \begin_inset Newline newline
17719 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
17720 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
17727 \begin_layout Itemize
17729 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17734 is not recommended for use as a base type.
17735 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
17736 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
17741 \begin_layout Standard
17743 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
17744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17751 refers to applying or removing font properties.
17752 When a property is marked for toggling in the
17755 \begin_inset space ~
17760 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
17761 the property to be removed.
17762 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
17763 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
17764 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
17767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17782 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
17783 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
17784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17791 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
17795 \begin_inset space ~
17800 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
17803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17811 If you, for example, set
17812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17830 \begin_inset space ~
17835 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
17837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17844 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
17849 \begin_layout Standard
17851 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
17854 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
17855 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
17858 \begin_layout Section
17859 Printing and Previewing
17862 \begin_layout Subsection
17866 \begin_layout Standard
17867 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
17868 using \SpecialChar LyX
17869 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
17870 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
17871 goes on behind-the-scenes.
17872 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
17874 Additional Features
17879 \begin_layout Standard
17881 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
17884 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
17885 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
17886 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17889 is what you use to do your actual writing.
17890 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
17891 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17892 to turn your writing into printable output.
17893 This happens in two stages:
17896 \begin_layout Enumerate
17897 First, \SpecialChar LyX
17898 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
17900 a file with the extension,
17901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17915 \begin_layout Enumerate
17916 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
17917 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17918 to use the commands in the
17922 file to produce printable output.
17925 \begin_layout Subsection
17926 Output file formats
17927 \begin_inset Index idx
17930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17937 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17939 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17946 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17948 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
17950 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
17954 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
17958 \begin_inset Index idx
17961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17963 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
17965 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
17976 \begin_layout Standard
17977 This file type has the extension
17978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17990 It contains your document as plain text
17991 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
17993 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
17994 following the rules of the
17995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17998 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
17999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18007 \begin_layout Standard
18008 You can export your document to
18009 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
18011 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
18016 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18017 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18019 \begin_inset space ~
18025 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
18026 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
18027 bibliography (section
18028 \begin_inset space ~
18032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18034 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
18039 If your document includes such material, use
18041 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18042 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18044 \begin_inset space ~
18048 \begin_inset space ~
18052 \begin_inset space ~
18060 \begin_inset space ~
18064 \begin_inset space ~
18070 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
18071 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
18072 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
18074 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
18080 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18083 \begin_inset Index idx
18086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18087 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
18096 \begin_layout Standard
18097 This file type has the extension
18098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18109 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18112 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
18113 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
18114 -Errors or to process it manually
18115 with console commands.
18116 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
18117 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
18118 's temporary directory whenever you
18119 view or export your document.
18122 \begin_layout Standard
18123 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18124 -file using the menu
18126 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18127 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18131 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
18132 export variants are explained in section
18133 \begin_inset space ~
18137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18139 reference "subsec:Export"
18146 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18148 \begin_inset Index idx
18151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18160 \begin_layout Standard
18161 This file type has the extension
18162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18182 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
18183 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
18184 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
18188 \begin_layout Standard
18189 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
18190 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
18191 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
18192 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
18193 when you view the DVI.
18194 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
18197 \begin_layout Standard
18198 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
18200 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18201 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18206 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18207 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18209 \begin_inset space ~
18215 The latter option uses the program
18217 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18223 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18226 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
18227 font access (see section
18228 \begin_inset space ~
18232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18234 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18239 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18240 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
18245 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18247 \begin_inset Index idx
18250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18251 File formats ! PostScript
18259 \begin_layout Standard
18260 This file type has the extension
18261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18273 PostScript was developed by the company
18277 as a printer language.
18278 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
18280 PostScript can be seen as a
18281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18284 programming language
18285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18288 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
18292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18293 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18300 \begin_inset Index idx
18303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18305 packages ! pstricks
18315 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
18318 \begin_layout Standard
18319 PostScript can only contain images in the format
18320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18323 Encapsulated PostScript
18324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18327 (EPS, file extension
18328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18340 As \SpecialChar LyX
18341 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
18342 convert them in the background to EPS.
18343 If, for example, you have 50
18344 \begin_inset space ~
18347 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
18349 \begin_inset space ~
18352 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
18353 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
18355 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
18356 EPS to avoid this problem.
18359 \begin_layout Standard
18360 You can export to PostScript using the menu
18362 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18363 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18369 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18371 \begin_inset Index idx
18374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18381 \begin_inset Index idx
18384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18393 \begin_layout Standard
18394 This file type has the extension
18395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18411 Portable Document Format
18412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18419 was derived from PostScript.
18420 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
18422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18429 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
18430 looks exactly the same.
18433 \begin_layout Standard
18434 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
18435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18438 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18442 (JPG, file extension
18443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18470 Portable Network Graphics
18471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18474 (PNG, file extension
18475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18487 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
18488 converts them in the
18489 background to one of these formats.
18490 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
18491 will slow down your workflow.
18492 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
18495 \begin_layout Standard
18496 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
18498 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18504 \begin_layout Description
18506 \begin_inset space ~
18509 (pdflatex) This uses the program
18513 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18516 \begin_layout Description
18518 \begin_inset space ~
18525 ) This uses the program
18527 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18530 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18533 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18536 is a new engine, derived from
18540 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
18541 access (see section
18542 \begin_inset space ~
18546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18548 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18553 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18554 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
18559 \begin_layout Description
18561 \begin_inset space ~
18568 ) This uses the program
18573 that converts your file directly to PDF.
18579 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
18580 font access (see section
18581 \begin_inset space ~
18585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18587 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18592 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
18593 vertically written Japanese.
18596 \begin_layout Description
18598 \begin_inset space ~
18601 (cropped) This is the same as
18604 \begin_inset space ~
18609 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
18610 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
18611 to generate good-looking
18612 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
18615 \begin_layout Description
18617 \begin_inset space ~
18620 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
18624 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
18628 \begin_layout Description
18630 \begin_inset space ~
18633 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
18637 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
18638 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
18642 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
18643 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
18646 \begin_layout Standard
18650 \begin_inset space ~
18659 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
18660 works without problems.
18661 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
18662 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
18666 \begin_inset space ~
18674 \begin_inset space ~
18679 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
18687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18689 \begin_inset Index idx
18692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18693 FileFormats ! XHTML
18699 \begin_inset Index idx
18702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18711 \begin_layout Standard
18712 This file type has the extension
18713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18725 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
18726 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
18727 When \SpecialChar LyX
18728 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
18729 suitable for the purpose.
18730 For the math output you can choose in the menu
18732 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18733 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18736 between different formats, which are described in section
18738 Math Output in XHTML
18743 \begin_inset space ~
18751 \begin_layout Standard
18752 XHTML output remains
18753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18760 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
18761 features are supported yet.
18765 and the World Wide Web
18769 Additional Features
18771 manual, for more information.
18774 \begin_layout Standard
18775 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
18777 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18778 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18784 \begin_layout Subsection
18786 \begin_inset Index idx
18789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18798 \begin_layout Standard
18799 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
18800 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
18809 or use the toolbar button
18816 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
18817 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
18818 \begin_inset space ~
18822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18824 reference "sec:File-Formats"
18828 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
18830 \begin_inset space ~
18834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18836 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
18841 Further output formats can be selected via
18843 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18844 View (Other Formats)
18846 or the toolbar button
18855 \begin_layout Standard
18856 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
18857 viewer window using the menu
18859 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18864 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18865 Update (Other Formats)
18870 \begin_layout Standard
18871 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
18874 To have a real output, export your document.
18877 \begin_layout Section
18878 A few Words about Typography
18879 \begin_inset Index idx
18882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18891 \begin_layout Subsection
18892 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
18893 \begin_inset Index idx
18896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18903 \begin_inset Index idx
18906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18915 \begin_layout Standard
18916 In \SpecialChar LyX
18918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18929 symbol comes in four variants: the
18946 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18952 \begin_layout Standard
18953 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18963 height_special "totalheight"
18968 backgroundcolor "none"
18971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18972 \begin_inset Tabular
18973 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18974 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18975 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18976 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18977 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18978 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18979 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19007 <row interlinespace="3mm">
19008 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19047 <row interlinespace="3mm">
19048 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19070 system key combination
19074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19075 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
19078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19087 and the em dash with
19090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19103 is the Mac label for the right
19113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19126 <row interlinespace="3mm">
19127 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19149 system key combination or
19150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19164 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19177 \begin_inset Formula $-$
19185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19216 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
19222 \begin_layout Standard
19223 Dashes can also be inserted with
19225 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19227 \begin_inset space ~
19230 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
19238 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
19239 and 2014 for the en dash).
19242 \begin_layout Standard
19243 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
19244 mode and has a length of its own.
19245 Here are some examples:
19248 \begin_layout Enumerate
19249 line- and page-breaks
19250 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19260 \begin_layout Enumerate
19262 \begin_inset space ~
19266 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19276 \begin_layout Enumerate
19277 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
19278 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19288 \begin_layout Enumerate
19289 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
19293 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19303 \begin_layout Standard
19305 \begin_inset CommandInset href
19307 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
19308 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
19316 \begin_layout Subsection
19317 Dashes and Line Breaks
19318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19320 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
19327 \begin_layout Standard
19328 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
19329 case and locale, e.
19330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19336 \begin_layout Itemize
19337 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
19338 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
19341 \begin_layout Itemize
19342 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
19346 \begin_layout Itemize
19347 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
19348 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
19351 \begin_layout Standard
19352 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
19353 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19364 allows line breaks after hyphens
19365 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
19367 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
19370 en-dashes and em-dashes.
19373 \begin_layout Enumerate
19374 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
19375 \begin_inset space ~
19378 – common in British English and generally recommended by
19380 The Elements of Typographic Style
19383 \begin_inset space ~
19386 – can be prevented using
19387 \change_deleted 177693 1654619779
19389 \change_inserted 177693 1654619781
19395 \begin_layout Enumerate
19396 Unwanted line breaks
19401 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
19403 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
19406 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
19410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19413 Prevent Hyphenation
19418 \begin_inset space ~
19434 in \SpecialChar TeX
19436 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
19438 \change_deleted 177693 1654619787
19440 \change_inserted 177693 1654619789
19442 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
19443 space does not suffice
19447 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
19452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19454 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
19455 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
19456 in the document language.
19457 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
19471 \begin_layout Itemize
19473 \begin_inset space ~
19477 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19487 height_special "totalheight"
19492 backgroundcolor "none"
19495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19504 \begin_layout Itemize
19506 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19516 height_special "totalheight"
19521 backgroundcolor "none"
19524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19526 \begin_inset space ~
19534 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19535 \begin_inset space ~
19538 – sont très utiles.
19541 \begin_layout Itemize
19546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19555 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
19559 \begin_layout Standard
19560 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
19561 \begin_inset space ~
19564 – in contrast to an overfull line
19565 \begin_inset space ~
19568 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19572 \begin_layout Standard
19573 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
19576 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19577 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19578 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19579 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19584 \begin_layout Enumerate
19585 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
19586 They can be prevented using
19587 \change_deleted 177693 1654619794
19589 \change_inserted 177693 1654619796
19592 spaces (without need for a makebox or \SpecialChar TeX
19598 \begin_layout Itemize
19600 \begin_inset space ~
19603 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19604 \begin_inset space ~
19607 – sont très utiles.
19611 \begin_layout Enumerate
19612 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
19613 \begin_inset Newline newline
19618 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19619 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19621 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
19623 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
19625 \begin_inset space ~
19631 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
19633 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
19635 \begin_inset space ~
19646 \begin_layout Itemize
19647 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
19648 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
19649 should be followed by
19650 a line break opportunity.
19653 \begin_layout Standard
19654 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
19655 \begin_inset space ~
19659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19661 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19672 \begin_layout Enumerate
19673 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19674 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
19675 or en dashes (see section
19676 \begin_inset space ~
19680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19682 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19692 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19693 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
19696 \begin_layout Standard
19697 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
19699 \begin_inset space ~
19702 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
19703 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
19705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19712 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
19713 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
19721 \begin_layout Standard
19722 Since \SpecialChar LyX
19724 \begin_inset space ~
19727 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19729 prevents ligation to dashes.
19731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19738 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
19743 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
19744 after the input (unless the current text font is
19752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19753 The behavior was changed since
19754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19769 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
19770 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
19771 as non-breakable dashes.
19772 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
19780 \begin_layout Standard
19783 \begin_inset space ~
19791 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
19793 \begin_inset space ~
19796 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
19799 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19800 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19801 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19802 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19804 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
19808 If you used both literal and
19809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19816 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
19818 \begin_inset space ~
19821 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
19822 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
19825 \begin_layout Subsection
19827 \begin_inset Index idx
19830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19839 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
19846 \begin_layout Standard
19847 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
19848 but automatically in the output.
19849 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19855 \begin_inset Index idx
19858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19865 following the rules of the document language.
19867 does not hyphenate text in the
19871 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
19874 \begin_layout Standard
19876 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
19880 font and with unusual constructs, like
19881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19889 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
19890 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
19891 This is done with the menu
19893 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19894 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19896 \begin_inset space ~
19902 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19904 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19908 \begin_layout Standard
19909 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
19910 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
19912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19921 would then see the hyphen
19922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19929 as a line break possibility.
19930 A line break at this point would look ugly.
19931 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a
19932 \change_deleted 177693 1654619800
19934 \change_inserted 177693 1654619804
19939 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19940 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19942 \change_deleted 177693 1654619809
19944 \change_inserted 177693 1654619812
19949 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
19951 Prevent Hyphenation
19956 \begin_inset space ~
19964 \begin_layout Subsection
19966 \begin_inset Index idx
19969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19979 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19982 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19989 \begin_layout Standard
19990 When \SpecialChar LyX
19991 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19992 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19994 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
19997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20000 appropriate amount of space.
20001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20004 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
20006 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
20007 gets after another word.
20010 \begin_layout Standard
20011 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
20012 not work in all cases.
20014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20025 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
20026 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
20029 \begin_layout Standard
20030 Here are some examples of
20034 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
20037 \begin_layout Itemize
20042 \begin_layout Itemize
20047 \begin_layout Standard
20048 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
20051 \begin_layout Itemize
20053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20057 this is too much space!
20060 \begin_layout Itemize
20065 \begin_layout Standard
20066 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
20069 \begin_layout Standard
20070 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
20073 \begin_layout Enumerate
20077 \begin_inset space ~
20082 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
20083 \begin_inset space ~
20087 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
20089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20091 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
20096 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
20098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20100 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
20107 \begin_inset Index idx
20110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20111 Spaces ! inter-word
20119 \begin_layout Enumerate
20123 \begin_inset space ~
20128 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
20129 \begin_inset space ~
20133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20135 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
20140 \begin_inset Index idx
20143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20152 \begin_layout Enumerate
20156 \begin_inset space ~
20160 \begin_inset space ~
20164 \begin_inset space ~
20171 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20173 \begin_inset space ~
20178 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
20179 This function is also bound to
20182 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
20188 \begin_layout Standard
20189 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
20192 \begin_layout Itemize
20194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20198 \begin_inset space \space{}
20201 this is too much space!
20204 \begin_layout Itemize
20205 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
20209 \begin_layout Standard
20210 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
20211 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
20213 will take care of this.
20216 \begin_layout Standard
20217 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
20221 \begin_inset space ~
20227 feature described in the section
20229 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
20234 Additional Features
20239 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20241 \begin_inset Index idx
20244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20245 Typography ! Quotation marks
20251 \begin_inset Index idx
20254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20255 Quotation marks | see
20259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20285 \begin_layout Standard
20287 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
20288 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
20289 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
20291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20299 The keyboard character,
20303 , generates this automatically.
20306 \begin_layout Standard
20307 You can specify what character the
20311 key produces by using the submenu
20317 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20321 \begin_inset Index idx
20324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20325 Document ! Settings
20330 dialog and switching the
20334 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
20335 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
20337 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
20339 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
20343 \begin_inset space ~
20349 \begin_layout Labeling
20350 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20362 \begin_inset space ~
20366 \begin_inset space ~
20370 \begin_inset Quotes els
20374 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20388 \begin_inset Quotes els
20392 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20395 quotation marks (as common, e.
20396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20402 \begin_layout Labeling
20403 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20406 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20410 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20414 \begin_inset space ~
20418 \begin_inset space ~
20422 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20426 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20432 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20436 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20440 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20444 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20447 quotation marks (as common, e.
20448 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20454 \begin_layout Labeling
20455 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20458 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20462 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20466 \begin_inset space ~
20470 \begin_inset space ~
20474 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20478 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20484 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20488 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20492 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20496 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20499 quotation marks (as common, e.
20500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20506 \begin_layout Labeling
20507 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20510 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20514 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20518 \begin_inset space ~
20522 \begin_inset space ~
20526 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20530 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20536 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20540 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20544 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20548 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20551 quotation marks (as common, e.
20552 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20558 \begin_layout Labeling
20559 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20562 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20566 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20570 \begin_inset space ~
20574 \begin_inset space ~
20578 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20582 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20588 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20592 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20596 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20600 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20603 quotation marks (as common, e.
20604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20607 g., in Switzerland)
20610 \begin_layout Labeling
20611 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20614 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20618 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20622 \begin_inset space ~
20626 \begin_inset space ~
20630 \begin_inset Quotes als
20634 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20640 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20644 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20648 \begin_inset Quotes als
20652 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20655 quotation marks (as common, e.
20656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20662 \begin_layout Labeling
20663 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20666 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20670 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20674 \begin_inset space ~
20678 \begin_inset space ~
20682 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20686 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20692 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20696 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20700 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20704 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20707 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
20710 \begin_layout Labeling
20711 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20714 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20718 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20722 \begin_inset space ~
20726 \begin_inset space ~
20730 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20734 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20740 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20744 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20748 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20752 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20755 quotation marks (as common, e.
20756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20759 g., in Great Britain)
20762 \begin_layout Labeling
20763 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20766 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20770 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20774 \begin_inset space ~
20778 \begin_inset space ~
20782 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20786 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20792 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20796 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20800 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20804 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20807 quotation marks (as common, e.
20808 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20814 \begin_layout Labeling
20815 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20818 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20822 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20826 \begin_inset space ~
20830 \begin_inset space ~
20834 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20838 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20844 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20848 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20852 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20856 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20859 quotation marks (another style common in France)
20863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20864 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
20865 since these look identical to the inner marks.
20866 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
20867 the inner marks differ).
20875 \begin_layout Labeling
20876 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20879 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20883 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20887 \begin_inset space ~
20891 \begin_inset space ~
20895 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20899 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20905 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20909 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20913 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20917 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20920 quotation marks (as common, e.
20921 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20927 \begin_layout Labeling
20928 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20931 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20935 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20939 \begin_inset space ~
20943 \begin_inset space ~
20947 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20951 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20957 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20961 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20965 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20969 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20972 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
20973 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
20977 \begin_layout Labeling
20978 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20980 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
20983 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20987 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20991 \begin_inset space ~
20995 \begin_inset space ~
20999 \begin_inset Quotes ald
21003 \begin_inset Quotes ard
21011 \begin_inset Quotes pld
21019 \begin_inset Quotes prd
21027 \begin_inset Quotes ald
21035 \begin_inset Quotes ard
21040 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
21045 \begin_layout Labeling
21046 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21047 \begin_inset Quotes jld
21055 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
21061 \begin_inset space ~
21065 \begin_inset space ~
21071 \begin_inset Quotes jls
21079 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
21083 \begin_inset Quotes jld
21087 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
21091 \begin_inset Quotes jls
21095 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
21098 quotation marks (as common, e.
21099 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21108 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
21109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21111 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
21117 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
21118 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
21126 \begin_layout Labeling
21127 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21128 \begin_inset Quotes kld
21136 \begin_inset Quotes krd
21142 \begin_inset space ~
21146 \begin_inset space ~
21152 \begin_inset Quotes kls
21160 \begin_inset Quotes krs
21164 \begin_inset Quotes kld
21168 \begin_inset Quotes krd
21172 \begin_inset Quotes kls
21176 \begin_inset Quotes krs
21179 quotation marks (as common, e.
21180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21183 g., in North Korea and China)
21184 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
21186 \begin_inset script superscript
21188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21190 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
21191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21193 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
21208 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
21213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21214 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
21215 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
21225 \begin_layout Standard
21226 Inner quotation marks
21230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21231 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
21232 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
21233 case (and specifically the British style shows that
21234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21241 does not necessarily mean
21242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21250 This is why we call them
21251 \begin_inset Quotes els
21255 \begin_inset Quotes ers
21259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21271 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
21273 \begin_inset Quotes els
21277 \begin_inset Quotes ers
21280 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
21283 arg "quote-insert inner"
21288 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21294 \begin_layout Standard
21295 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
21296 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
21297 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
21298 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
21299 If you check the setting
21301 Use dynamic quotation marks
21305 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21306 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21309 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
21310 they appear in a special color).
21311 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
21312 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
21314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21317 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
21320 \begin_layout Standard
21321 Individual quotation marks (i.
21322 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21325 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
21326 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
21330 \begin_layout Subsection
21332 \begin_inset Index idx
21335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21336 Typography ! Ligatures
21342 \begin_inset Index idx
21345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21374 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21376 name "subsec:Ligatures"
21383 \begin_layout Standard
21384 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
21385 print them as single characters.
21386 These groups are known as
21391 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
21392 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
21394 Here are the standard ligatures:
21397 \begin_layout Itemize
21401 \begin_layout Itemize
21405 \begin_layout Itemize
21409 \begin_layout Itemize
21413 \begin_layout Itemize
21417 \begin_layout Standard
21418 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
21421 \begin_layout Standard
21422 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
21423 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
21424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21431 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
21432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21447 To break a ligature, use
21449 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21450 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21452 \begin_inset space ~
21459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21470 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21487 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21495 \begin_layout Subsection
21497 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
21499 \begin_inset Index idx
21502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21512 \begin_layout Standard
21515 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21516 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
21520 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
21523 \begin_layout Description
21525 The name of the game.
21528 \begin_layout Description
21530 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
21534 \begin_layout Description
21536 The \SpecialChar TeX
21537 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
21541 \begin_layout Description
21542 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
21543 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21547 \begin_layout Standard
21548 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21554 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
21558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21562 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
21563 world to give programs geek version numbers.
21564 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
21565 converges to the number
21566 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
21569 : The actual version is
21570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21578 , the previous one was
21579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21590 \begin_layout Subsection
21592 \begin_inset Index idx
21595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21604 \begin_layout Standard
21605 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
21606 space between two words.
21607 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
21610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21617 for units use the menu
21619 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21620 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21622 \begin_inset space ~
21630 arg "space-insert thin"
21636 \begin_layout Standard
21637 Here is an example to show the differences:
21640 \begin_layout Standard
21641 \begin_inset Tabular
21642 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
21643 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21644 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21645 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21652 \begin_inset space ~
21656 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21668 space between number and unit
21675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21680 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21684 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21696 half space between number and unit
21709 \begin_layout Subsection
21711 \begin_inset Index idx
21714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21715 Typography ! Widows and orphans
21723 \begin_layout Standard
21724 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
21726 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
21727 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
21728 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
21729 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
21730 These bits of text became known as
21741 \begin_layout Standard
21742 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
21743 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
21744 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
21745 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
21746 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
21747 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
21748 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
21749 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
21750 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
21751 \begin_inset Newline newline
21759 \begin_inset Newline newline
21767 \begin_inset Newline newline
21770 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21771 preamble of your document to avoid them.
21772 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
21774 \begin_inset space ~
21778 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21780 key "latexcompanion"
21786 \begin_inset space ~
21790 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21797 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21798 's page break mechanism.
21801 \begin_layout Chapter
21802 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
21803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21805 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
21812 \begin_layout Standard
21813 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
21816 \begin_inset space ~
21822 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
21825 \begin_layout Section
21827 \begin_inset Index idx
21830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21846 \begin_layout Standard
21848 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
21851 \begin_layout Description
21854 \begin_inset space ~
21857 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
21858 \begin_inset Newline newline
21862 \begin_inset Note Note
21865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21866 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
21874 \begin_layout Description
21875 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
21876 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
21877 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21880 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
21881 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
21883 \begin_inset space ~
21889 \begin_inset Newline newline
21893 \begin_inset Note Comment
21896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21897 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
21906 \begin_layout Description
21908 \begin_inset space ~
21911 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
21912 set in the document settings under
21914 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
21916 \begin_inset space ~
21922 \begin_inset Newline newline
21926 \begin_inset Newline newline
21930 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21939 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
21940 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
21945 of a comment that appears in the output.
21951 \begin_inset Newline newline
21955 \begin_inset Newline newline
21958 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
21961 \begin_layout Standard
21962 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
21970 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21974 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
21977 \begin_layout Section
21979 \begin_inset Index idx
21982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21991 name "sec:Footnotes"
21998 \begin_layout Standard
22000 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
22003 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22006 or the toolbar button
22009 arg "footnote-insert"
22021 \begin_inset Graphics
22022 filename clipart/footnote.png
22031 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
22032 's representation of your footnote.
22042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22061 label, the box will
22065 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
22066 Clicking on the box label again will close
22079 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
22080 and click on the footnote
22095 \begin_layout Standard
22096 Here is an example footnote:
22104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22105 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
22113 \begin_layout Standard
22114 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
22115 position where the footnote box is placed.
22116 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
22117 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
22118 according to the document class.
22120 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
22121 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22127 ey are described in the
22130 \begin_inset space ~
22138 \begin_layout Section
22140 \begin_inset Index idx
22143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22150 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22152 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
22159 \begin_layout Standard
22160 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
22162 When you insert a margin note via the menu
22164 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22166 \begin_inset space ~
22171 or the toolbar button
22174 arg "marginalnote-insert"
22193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22200 appearing within your text.
22201 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
22202 's representation of your margin
22211 \begin_layout Standard
22212 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
22216 \begin_inset Marginal
22219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22221 This is a marginal note.
22229 \begin_layout Standard
22230 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
22231 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
22232 pages, right on odd pages.
22235 \begin_layout Standard
22236 For further information about marginal notes see the section
22239 \begin_inset space ~
22247 \begin_inset space ~
22255 \begin_layout Section
22256 Graphics and Images
22257 \begin_inset Index idx
22260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22267 \begin_inset Index idx
22270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22277 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22279 name "sec:Graphics"
22286 \begin_layout Standard
22287 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
22288 you want and click on the toolbar icon
22291 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22296 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22300 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
22303 \begin_layout Standard
22304 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
22309 tab allows you to choose your image file.
22310 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
22312 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
22313 \begin_inset space ~
22317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22319 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
22326 \begin_layout Standard
22331 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
22332 of the image in the output.
22333 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
22337 \begin_inset space ~
22341 \begin_inset space ~
22350 \begin_inset space ~
22354 \begin_inset space ~
22358 \begin_inset space ~
22363 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
22364 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
22372 \begin_layout Standard
22376 \begin_inset space ~
22380 \begin_inset space ~
22385 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
22386 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
22388 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
22393 \begin_inset space ~
22398 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
22399 with the image size is printed.
22402 \begin_layout Standard
22403 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
22404 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
22406 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
22409 \begin_layout Standard
22411 \begin_inset Graphics
22412 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
22420 \begin_layout Standard
22421 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
22422 the image into a float, see section
22423 \begin_inset space ~
22427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22429 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22436 \begin_layout Subsection
22438 \begin_inset Index idx
22441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22448 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22450 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
22457 \begin_layout Standard
22458 You can insert images in any known file format.
22459 But as we explained in section
22460 \begin_inset space ~
22464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22466 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22470 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
22472 therefore uses the program
22476 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
22477 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
22478 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
22479 \begin_inset space ~
22483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22485 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22492 \begin_layout Standard
22493 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
22496 \begin_layout Description
22498 \begin_inset space ~
22501 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
22502 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
22503 Well-known bitmap image formats are
22504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22507 Graphics Interchange Format
22508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22511 (GIF, file extension
22512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22524 \begin_inset Index idx
22527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22559 Portable Network Graphics
22560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22563 (PNG, file extension
22564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22576 \begin_inset Index idx
22579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22611 Joint Photographic Experts Group
22612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22615 (JPG, file extension
22616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22640 \begin_inset Index idx
22643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22674 \begin_layout Description
22676 \begin_inset space ~
22679 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
22681 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
22682 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
22683 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
22684 \begin_inset Newline newline
22687 Scalable image formats can be
22688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22691 Scalable Vector Graphics
22692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22695 (SVG, file extension
22696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22708 \begin_inset Index idx
22711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22743 Encapsulated PostScript
22744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22747 (EPS, file extension
22748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22760 \begin_inset Index idx
22763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22795 Portable Document Format
22796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22799 (PDF, file extension
22800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22812 \begin_inset Index idx
22815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22830 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
22831 result will not be scalable.
22832 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
22837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22838 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
22846 \begin_layout Standard
22847 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
22854 \begin_layout Subsection
22855 Grouping of Image Settings
22856 \begin_inset Index idx
22859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22860 Images ! Settings grouping
22868 \begin_layout Standard
22869 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
22871 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
22872 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
22874 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
22875 need to manually change each of them.
22878 \begin_layout Standard
22879 A new group can be set by pressing the button
22882 \begin_inset space ~
22886 \begin_inset space ~
22898 \begin_inset space ~
22902 \begin_inset space ~
22908 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
22909 and checking the name of the desired group.
22912 \begin_layout Section
22914 \begin_inset Index idx
22917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22933 \begin_layout Standard
22934 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
22937 arg "tabular-insert"
22942 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22946 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
22947 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
22948 , and you can select a specific (border) style
22951 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
22952 from the rest of the table.
22953 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
22954 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
22956 Here is an example table:
22959 \begin_layout Standard
22961 \begin_inset Tabular
22962 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
22963 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22964 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22965 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22966 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22967 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23161 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
23165 \begin_layout Standard
23167 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
23168 This corresponds to the
23169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23176 table style listed in the style selection.
23179 \begin_layout Standard
23181 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
23182 Other available styles include:
23185 \begin_layout Itemize
23187 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
23189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23196 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
23200 \begin_layout Itemize
23202 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
23203 a border-less table with no lines at all,
23206 \begin_layout Itemize
23208 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
23210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23217 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
23218 bold top/bottom lines (see
23228 \change_inserted 630872221 1621434190
23229 It is also possible to have an horizontal (thin) Footline above the last
23235 \begin_layout Standard
23237 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
23238 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
23239 button can be changed in
23241 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
23242 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
23246 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
23250 \begin_layout Subsection
23254 \begin_layout Standard
23255 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
23258 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
23262 This brings up the table dialog.
23263 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
23264 cursor is placed currently.
23265 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
23266 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
23267 done on all of your selection.
23270 \begin_layout Standard
23271 In addition to the table dialog, the
23274 \begin_inset space ~
23279 helps you in setting table properties.
23280 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
23283 \begin_layout Standard
23287 \begin_inset space ~
23292 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
23293 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
23294 current cell respectively.
23295 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
23297 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
23298 of text, see section
23299 \begin_inset space ~
23303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23305 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
23312 \begin_layout Standard
23313 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
23314 using the check box
23323 This will merge the cells to
23327 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
23328 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
23329 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
23330 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
23331 in the last row without the upper border:
23334 \begin_layout Standard
23336 \begin_inset Tabular
23337 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
23338 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
23339 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23340 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
23341 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
23342 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23353 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23362 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23438 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23473 \begin_layout Standard
23474 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
23475 -arguments for the table.
23476 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
23477 explained in the chapter
23484 \begin_inset space ~
23490 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
23491 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
23492 but are visible in the output.
23495 \begin_layout Standard
23496 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
23499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23504 Most DVI-viewers are
23508 able to display rotations.
23516 \begin_layout Standard
23521 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
23526 adds lines for all cell borders.
23529 \begin_layout Subsection
23531 \begin_inset Index idx
23534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23535 Tables ! Multi-page
23541 \begin_inset Index idx
23544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23553 \begin_layout Standard
23554 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
23557 \begin_inset space ~
23561 \begin_inset space ~
23569 \begin_inset space ~
23574 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
23575 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
23578 \begin_layout Description
23583 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
23584 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
23585 Except for the first page, if
23588 \begin_inset space ~
23596 \begin_layout Description
23600 \begin_inset space ~
23605 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
23606 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
23609 \begin_layout Description
23614 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
23615 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
23616 except for the last page, if
23619 \begin_inset space ~
23627 \begin_layout Description
23631 \begin_inset space ~
23636 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
23637 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
23640 \begin_layout Description
23641 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
23642 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
23644 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23648 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
23651 \begin_inset space ~
23659 \begin_layout Standard
23660 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
23661 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
23662 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
23668 In this context, first means first in this order:
23671 \begin_inset space ~
23683 \begin_inset space ~
23688 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
23691 \begin_layout Standard
23693 \begin_inset Tabular
23694 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
23695 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
23696 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
23697 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23698 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23699 <row endfirsthead="true">
23700 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23706 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
23711 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23720 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23730 <row endfirsthead="true">
23731 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23742 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23751 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23763 <row endhead="true">
23764 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23775 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23784 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23794 <row endhead="true">
23795 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23806 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23815 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23827 <row endfoot="true">
23828 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23839 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23848 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23879 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24820 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24829 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24838 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24849 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24880 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24911 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24942 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24973 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25004 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25035 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25066 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25097 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25128 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25159 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25190 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25221 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25252 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25283 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25314 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25345 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25376 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25407 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25438 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25469 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25500 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25531 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25562 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25593 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25624 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25655 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25686 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25717 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25748 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25779 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25809 <row endlastfoot="true">
25810 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25821 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
25824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25830 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25847 \begin_layout Subsection
25849 \begin_inset Index idx
25852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25861 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
25868 \begin_layout Standard
25869 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
25870 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
25871 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
25872 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
25876 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
25879 \begin_layout Standard
25880 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
25881 for the column in the table dialog.
25882 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
25883 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
25887 \begin_layout Standard
25889 \begin_inset Tabular
25890 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
25891 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25892 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25893 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
25894 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25914 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25983 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26039 This is longer now.
26044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26095 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
26096 This is longer now.
26101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26127 \begin_layout Standard
26128 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
26129 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
26133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26134 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
26135 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
26140 Selection with the mouse or with
26144 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
26145 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
26146 the selection from outside the table.
26149 \begin_layout Section
26151 \begin_inset Index idx
26154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26170 \begin_layout Subsection
26174 \begin_layout Standard
26175 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
26176 have a fixed location.
26178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26185 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
26193 \begin_inset space ~
26198 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
26199 too many notes on the current page.
26202 \begin_layout Standard
26203 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
26204 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
26205 and pages without text.
26206 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
26207 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
26208 Floats are therefore numbered.
26209 Referencing is described in section
26210 \begin_inset space ~
26214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26216 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26223 \begin_layout Standard
26224 To insert a float, use the menu
26226 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26230 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
26231 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
26233 After the label you can insert the caption text.
26234 \begin_inset Index idx
26237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26243 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
26244 paragraph within the float.
26245 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
26246 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
26247 left-clicking on the box label.
26248 A closed float box looks like this:
26249 \begin_inset Graphics
26250 filename clipart/float.png
26255 – a gray button with a red label.
26258 \begin_layout Standard
26259 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
26261 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
26264 \begin_layout Subsection
26266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26268 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
26273 \begin_inset Index idx
26276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26277 Floats ! Figure floats
26285 \begin_layout Standard
26287 \begin_inset space ~
26291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26293 reference "fig:A-star-in"
26297 was created using the menu
26299 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26300 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
26306 arg "float-insert figure"
26310 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
26313 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26319 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
26323 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
26324 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
26326 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26328 \begin_inset space ~
26336 arg "layout-paragraph"
26342 \begin_layout Standard
26343 \begin_inset Float figure
26350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26352 \begin_inset Graphics
26353 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
26362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26363 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26366 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26368 name "fig:A-star-in"
26385 \begin_layout Standard
26386 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
26387 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
26389 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26398 ) and refer to it using the menu
26400 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26406 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26410 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
26411 vague references like
26412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26419 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
26420 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
26422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26430 For more about cross-references, see section
26431 \begin_inset space ~
26435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26437 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26444 \begin_layout Standard
26445 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
26446 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
26447 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
26448 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
26449 as described in section
26450 \begin_inset space ~
26454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26456 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26462 \begin_inset space ~
26466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26468 reference "fig:Two-images"
26472 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
26473 You can also set the images one below the other.
26475 \begin_inset space ~
26479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26481 reference "fig:Undefinable"
26486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26488 reference "fig:Star"
26492 are the subfigures.
26495 \begin_layout Standard
26496 \begin_inset Float figure
26503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26504 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26508 \begin_inset Float figure
26515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26516 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26519 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26521 name "fig:Undefinable"
26533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26534 \begin_inset Graphics
26535 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
26547 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26551 \begin_inset Float figure
26558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26559 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26577 \begin_inset Graphics
26578 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
26590 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26597 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26602 name "fig:Two-images"
26619 \begin_layout Subsection
26621 \begin_inset Index idx
26624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26625 Floats ! Table floats
26633 \begin_layout Standard
26634 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
26636 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26637 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
26640 or the toolbar button
26643 arg "float-insert table"
26647 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
26648 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
26649 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
26651 \begin_inset space ~
26655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26657 reference "tab:Table-float"
26664 \begin_layout Standard
26665 \begin_inset Float table
26672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26673 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26678 name "tab:Table-float"
26690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26692 \begin_inset Tabular
26693 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
26694 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26695 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26696 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26697 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26824 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
26832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26845 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26848 \end{array}\right]$
26856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26869 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
26890 \begin_layout Subsection
26892 \begin_inset Index idx
26895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26904 \begin_layout Standard
26906 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
26907 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
26908 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
26910 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
26918 \begin_inset space ~
26926 \begin_layout Section
26928 \begin_inset Index idx
26931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26940 \begin_layout Standard
26942 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
26944 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
26945 \begin_inset space \space{}
26951 \begin_layout Standard
26952 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
26953 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
26955 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26959 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
26960 and its alignment within the page.
26963 \begin_layout Standard
26965 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26975 height_special "totalheight"
26980 backgroundcolor "none"
26983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26986 This is a minipage.
26987 The text is set in an italic style.
26990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26993 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
26994 another formatting.
27002 \begin_layout Standard
27003 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
27006 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
27010 as described in section
27011 \begin_inset space ~
27015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27017 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
27022 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
27028 \begin_layout Standard
27029 \begin_inset Box Frameless
27039 height_special "totalheight"
27044 backgroundcolor "none"
27047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27048 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
27049 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
27055 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
27059 \begin_inset Box Frameless
27069 height_special "totalheight"
27074 backgroundcolor "none"
27077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27078 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
27079 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
27087 \begin_layout Standard
27088 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27094 \begin_layout Standard
27095 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
27097 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
27104 \begin_inset space ~
27112 \begin_layout Chapter
27113 Mathematical Formulas
27114 \begin_inset Index idx
27117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27124 \begin_inset Index idx
27127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27158 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
27165 \begin_layout Standard
27166 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
27171 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
27174 \begin_layout Section
27176 \begin_inset Index idx
27179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27188 \begin_layout Standard
27189 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
27202 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
27204 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
27205 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
27206 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
27208 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27214 \begin_layout Standard
27215 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
27219 \begin_inset space ~
27224 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
27227 \begin_layout Standard
27228 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
27229 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
27232 \begin_layout Standard
27233 This is a line with an inline formula
27234 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
27240 \begin_layout Standard
27241 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
27242 paragraph, like this one:
27243 \begin_inset Formula
27250 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
27253 \begin_layout Standard
27255 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
27257 For example, typing
27258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27271 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
27272 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
27276 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
27279 \begin_inset space ~
27287 \begin_layout Subsection
27288 Navigating in Formulas
27289 \begin_inset Index idx
27292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27301 \begin_layout Standard
27302 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
27303 achieved with the arrow keys.
27305 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
27306 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
27311 will leave a formula construct (a square root
27312 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
27316 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
27320 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
27323 \end{array}\right]$
27331 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
27336 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
27337 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
27340 \begin_layout Standard
27345 , printed in this document as
27346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27350 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27357 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
27358 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
27359 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
27364 For example, if you want
27365 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
27373 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27383 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27387 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27392 , since in the latter case only the
27395 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
27400 will be under the square root sign:
27401 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
27407 \begin_layout Standard
27408 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
27410 \begin_inset Formula
27412 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27421 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
27422 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
27425 \begin_layout Subsection
27429 \begin_layout Standard
27430 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
27431 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
27435 and a cursor movement key to select text.
27436 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
27437 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
27438 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
27439 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
27443 \begin_layout Subsection
27444 Exponents and Subscripts
27445 \begin_inset Index idx
27448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27455 \begin_inset Index idx
27458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27467 \begin_layout Standard
27468 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
27471 arg "math-superscript"
27477 arg "math-subscript"
27480 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
27482 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
27485 , type in a formula
27488 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27498 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
27504 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
27508 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
27514 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27520 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
27522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27529 , you have to use an extra
27533 to separate the circumflex and the character.
27534 For example, if you want
27535 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
27541 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27547 Subscripts are similar: To get
27548 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
27554 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27562 \begin_layout Subsection
27564 \begin_inset Index idx
27567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27576 \begin_layout Standard
27577 Create a fraction either with the command
27583 or by using the icon
27586 arg "math-insert \\frac"
27592 \begin_inset space ~
27598 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
27599 The cursor is above the fraction line.
27600 To move it to the bottom, simply press
27605 To move back up, press
27610 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
27611 \begin_inset Formula
27613 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
27616 \end{array}\right)}\right]
27624 \begin_layout Subsection
27626 \begin_inset Index idx
27629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27638 \begin_layout Standard
27639 Roots can be created using the
27642 \begin_inset space ~
27650 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
27656 arg "math-insert \\root"
27678 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
27684 always produces a square root.
27687 \begin_layout Subsection
27688 Operators with Limits
27689 \begin_inset Index idx
27692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27699 \begin_inset Index idx
27702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27711 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27718 \begin_layout Standard
27720 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
27724 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
27727 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
27728 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27729 by entering them as you would enter a super-
27730 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
27731 The sum operator will automatically place its
27732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27739 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
27741 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
27745 \begin_inset Formula
27747 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
27752 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
27756 \begin_layout Standard
27757 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
27759 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
27760 behind the operator and using the menu
27762 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27763 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27765 \begin_inset space ~
27769 \begin_inset space ~
27783 \begin_layout Standard
27784 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
27785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27793 \begin_inset Index idx
27796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27803 \begin_inset Formula
27805 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
27810 which will place the
27811 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
27815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27823 In inline formulas it looks like this:
27824 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
27830 \begin_layout Standard
27831 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
27838 Have a look at section
27839 \begin_inset space ~
27843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27845 reference "subsec:Functions"
27849 for an explanation of function macros.
27852 \begin_layout Subsection
27854 \begin_inset Index idx
27857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27866 \begin_layout Standard
27867 Most math symbols can be found in the
27870 \begin_inset space ~
27875 under one of several categories; including
27892 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
27896 \begin_layout Standard
27897 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27898 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
27899 don't have to use the
27902 \begin_inset space ~
27907 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
27909 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
27912 \begin_layout Subsection
27914 \begin_inset Index idx
27917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27926 \begin_layout Standard
27927 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
27933 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
27939 \begin_inset space ~
27947 arg "math-insert \\space"
27951 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
27952 For example, the sequence
27957 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
27960 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27962 \begin_inset Graphics
27963 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
27968 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
27969 the space marker and enter space again several times.
27970 With every space enter the size will be changed.
27971 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
27972 , because they are negative
27974 Here are two examples:
27977 \begin_layout Standard
27987 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
27993 \begin_layout Standard
28003 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
28009 \begin_layout Subsection
28011 \begin_inset Index idx
28014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28023 name "subsec:Functions"
28030 \begin_layout Standard
28034 \begin_inset space ~
28039 contains under the button
28042 arg "math-insert \\functions"
28045 a number of function macros, such as
28046 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
28050 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
28058 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
28065 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
28066 avoid confusions, because
28067 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
28071 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
28077 \begin_layout Standard
28078 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
28080 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
28084 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
28090 \begin_layout Standard
28091 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
28092 are placed, as described in section
28093 \begin_inset space ~
28097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28099 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
28106 \begin_layout Subsection
28108 \begin_inset Index idx
28111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28120 \begin_layout Standard
28121 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
28123 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
28124 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28125 commands, for example, to enter
28126 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
28129 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
28130 Our example is entered by typing
28135 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28142 \begin_inset space ~
28146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28148 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
28152 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
28155 \begin_layout Standard
28156 \begin_inset Float table
28163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28164 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28169 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
28173 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
28181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28183 \begin_inset Tabular
28184 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
28185 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28186 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28187 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28188 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28272 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
28282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28326 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
28336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28380 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
28390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28434 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
28444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28488 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
28498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28542 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
28552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28596 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
28606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28650 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
28660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28704 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
28714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28749 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
28770 \begin_layout Standard
28771 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
28774 \begin_inset space ~
28782 arg "math-insert \\hat"
28785 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
28789 \begin_layout Section
28790 Brackets and Delimiters
28791 \begin_inset Index idx
28794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28801 \begin_inset Index idx
28804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28811 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28813 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28820 \begin_layout Standard
28821 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
28823 For some purposes, using just the keys
28828 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
28829 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
28830 toolbar delimiter icon
28833 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
28837 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
28838 \begin_inset Formula
28840 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
28848 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
28849 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
28853 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
28856 and the expression on the right was entered using the
28862 \begin_inset Formula
28864 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
28872 \begin_layout Standard
28873 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
28874 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
28878 \begin_layout Standard
28879 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
28880 left side and right side.
28881 If you use the option
28884 \begin_inset space ~
28889 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
28890 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
28892 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
28897 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
28898 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
28901 \begin_layout Standard
28902 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
28903 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
28904 is to go inside the brackets.
28905 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
28910 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
28911 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
28912 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
28916 arg "math-delim ( )"
28922 \begin_layout Section
28923 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
28924 \begin_inset Index idx
28927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28934 \begin_inset Index idx
28937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28944 \begin_inset Index idx
28947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28948 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28956 \begin_layout Standard
28957 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
28961 \begin_inset space ~
28969 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
28973 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
28974 Here is an example:
28975 \begin_inset Formula
28977 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
28986 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
28987 \begin_inset space ~
28991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28993 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28998 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
28999 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
29000 This alignment is set in the box
29005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29054 for every column as default.
29055 For example, the sequence
29056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29067 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
29068 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
29069 corresponds to the relevant column.
29070 The result will look like this:
29071 \begin_inset Formula
29074 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
29075 column & has & has\,right\\
29076 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
29085 \begin_layout Standard
29086 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
29089 arg "newline-insert newline"
29092 while the cursor is in the matrix.
29093 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
29095 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29098 or the math toolbar.
29101 \begin_layout Standard
29102 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
29103 It can be created with the menu
29105 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29106 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29108 \begin_inset space ~
29120 Here is an example:
29121 \begin_inset Formula
29135 \begin_layout Standard
29136 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29139 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
29142 arg "newline-insert newline"
29146 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
29151 arg "newline-insert newline"
29154 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
29155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29162 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
29163 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
29164 A new row is created by every further entry of
29167 arg "newline-insert newline"
29171 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
29172 Here is an example:
29173 \begin_inset Formula
29175 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
29176 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
29181 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
29182 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
29183 \begin_inset Formula
29185 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
29193 \begin_layout Standard
29194 The multi-line formula type described here is called
29201 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
29202 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
29203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29205 reference "eq:asquared"
29210 The other types are described in section
29211 \begin_inset space ~
29215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29217 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29224 \begin_layout Section
29225 Formula Numbering and Referencing
29226 \begin_inset Index idx
29229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29230 Math ! Formula numbering
29236 \begin_inset Index idx
29239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29240 Math ! Referencing formulas
29246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29248 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29255 \begin_layout Standard
29256 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
29258 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29259 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29261 \begin_inset space ~
29265 \begin_inset space ~
29273 arg "math-number-toggle"
29277 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29278 within parentheses.
29279 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
29280 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
29281 the document class.
29282 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
29283 separated by a dot:
29284 \begin_inset Formula
29294 arg "math-number-toggle"
29297 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
29298 You can only number displayed formulas.
29301 \begin_layout Standard
29302 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
29304 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29305 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29307 \begin_inset space ~
29311 \begin_inset space ~
29319 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
29322 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
29323 \begin_inset Formula
29326 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
29332 To number all lines use the shortcut
29335 arg "math-number-toggle"
29341 \begin_layout Standard
29342 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29345 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
29346 A label is inserted with the menu
29348 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29357 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
29358 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
29359 It is recommended that you use the suggested
29360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29371 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
29372 label type when you have many labels in your document.
29373 We inserted in the following example the label
29374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29381 in the second line:
29382 \begin_inset Formula
29384 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
29385 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
29390 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
29391 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
29392 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
29394 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29396 \begin_inset space ~
29404 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29408 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
29409 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29410 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
29411 as the formula number:
29414 \begin_layout Standard
29415 This is a cross-reference to equation (
29416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29418 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29425 \begin_layout Standard
29426 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
29427 's cross-reference box are described in section
29428 \begin_inset space ~
29432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29434 reference "sec:Cross-References"
29439 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
29447 \begin_layout Section
29448 User defined math macros
29449 \begin_inset Index idx
29452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29461 \begin_layout Standard
29463 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
29464 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
29465 Math macros are explained in section
29468 \begin_inset space ~
29480 \begin_layout Section
29484 \begin_layout Subsection
29486 \begin_inset Index idx
29489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29498 \begin_layout Standard
29499 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
29500 To set a font in a formula, use the
29503 \begin_inset space ~
29511 arg "math-insert \\font"
29514 , or enter its command, listed in table
29515 \begin_inset space ~
29519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29521 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
29528 \begin_layout Standard
29529 \begin_inset Float table
29536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29537 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29542 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
29546 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
29554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29556 \begin_inset Tabular
29557 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
29558 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
29559 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29560 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29592 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
29600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29619 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
29627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29646 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
29654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29679 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
29687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29706 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
29714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29728 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
29729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29734 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
29735 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
29743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29748 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
29760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29764 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
29772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29798 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
29806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29820 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
29821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29826 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
29834 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
29842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29847 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
29859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29863 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
29871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29897 \begin_layout Standard
29898 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29906 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
29909 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
29911 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
29915 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
29934 \begin_layout Standard
29935 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
29936 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
29941 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a
29942 \change_deleted 177693 1654619816
29944 \change_inserted 177693 1654619818
29947 space when you need a space in the box.
29948 Here is an example where
29949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29960 denotes the set of numbers:
29961 \begin_inset Formula
29963 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
29971 \begin_layout Standard
29972 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
29973 You can, for example, put a character in
29982 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
29986 \begin_inset Newline newline
29989 So it is better not to use this feature.
29992 \begin_layout Standard
29993 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
29994 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
29998 \begin_inset Newline newline
30001 You can only print them emboldened using the command
30007 , which works like the other typeface commands:
30008 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
30014 \begin_layout Standard
30021 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
30024 \begin_layout Standard
30025 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
30027 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30028 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
30030 \begin_inset space ~
30038 \begin_layout Subsection
30040 \begin_inset Index idx
30043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30052 \begin_layout Standard
30053 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
30055 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
30059 \begin_inset space ~
30063 \begin_inset space ~
30071 \begin_inset space ~
30079 arg "math-insert \\font"
30083 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
30084 in black instead of blue.
30085 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
30086 Here is an example:
30087 \begin_inset Formula
30090 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
30091 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
30100 \begin_layout Subsection
30102 \begin_inset Index idx
30105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30114 \begin_layout Standard
30115 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
30116 automatically chosen in most situations.
30134 For most characters,
30142 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
30143 and certain other structures, are set larger in
30148 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
30149 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
30150 thinks are appropriate.
30151 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
30154 arg "math-insert \\style"
30158 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
30159 For example, you can set
30160 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
30163 , which is normally in
30172 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
30176 The four styles are used in the following example:
30179 \begin_layout Standard
30180 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
30184 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
30188 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
30192 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
30198 \begin_layout Standard
30199 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
30200 is set in a particular size with the menu
30202 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30204 \begin_inset space ~
30209 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
30210 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
30211 will be adjusted to correspond.
30212 As an example here is a formula in the font size
30213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30223 \begin_layout Standard
30227 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
30233 \begin_layout Section
30234 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
30236 \begin_inset Index idx
30239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30246 \begin_inset Index idx
30249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30258 \begin_layout Standard
30260 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
30261 that are in common use.
30264 \begin_layout Subsection
30265 Enabling AMS-Support
30268 \begin_layout Standard
30269 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
30271 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
30287 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
30288 selecting the checkbox
30291 \begin_inset space ~
30295 \begin_inset space ~
30299 \begin_inset space ~
30308 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30312 \begin_inset Index idx
30315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30316 Document ! Settings
30324 \begin_inset space ~
30330 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30331 -errors in formulas,
30332 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
30335 \begin_layout Subsection
30337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30339 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
30344 \begin_inset Index idx
30347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30348 Math ! Multi-line Equations
30356 \begin_layout Standard
30357 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
30358 provides a selection of different formula types.
30360 allows you to choose between
30381 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
30382 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30389 , for an explanation of these formula types.
30392 \begin_layout Chapter
30396 \begin_layout Section
30398 \begin_inset Index idx
30401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30408 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30410 name "sec:Cross-References"
30417 \begin_layout Standard
30418 One of \SpecialChar LyX
30419 's strengths is cross-references.
30420 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
30422 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
30423 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
30424 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
30427 \begin_layout Enumerate
30431 \begin_layout Enumerate
30432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30434 name "enu:Second-item"
30441 \begin_layout Enumerate
30445 \begin_layout Standard
30446 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
30448 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30451 or by pressing the toolbar button
30458 A gray label box like this:
30459 \begin_inset Graphics
30460 filename clipart/label.png
30464 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
30466 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
30468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30501 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
30502 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
30504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30518 \begin_layout Standard
30519 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
30521 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30524 or the toolbar button
30527 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
30531 A gray cross-reference box like this:
30532 \begin_inset Graphics
30533 filename clipart/reference.png
30537 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
30539 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
30540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30552 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
30556 \begin_layout Standard
30557 As an alternative to
30559 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30562 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
30567 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
30568 to the actual cursor position via the menu
30570 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30582 \begin_layout Standard
30583 Here is our cross-reference: Item
30584 \begin_inset space ~
30588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30590 reference "enu:Second-item"
30597 \begin_layout Standard
30598 It is recommended to use a
30599 \change_deleted 177693 1654619823
30601 \change_inserted 177693 1654619826
30608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30609 described in section
30610 \begin_inset space ~
30614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30616 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
30625 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
30626 line breaks between them.
30629 \begin_layout Standard
30630 There are eight formats of cross-references:
30633 \begin_layout Description
30634 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
30635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30637 reference "fig:Two-images"
30644 \begin_layout Description
30645 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
30646 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
30648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30658 reference "eq:tanhExp"
30665 \begin_layout Description
30666 <page>: prints the page number: Page
30667 \begin_inset space ~
30671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30672 LatexCommand pageref
30673 reference "fig:Two-images"
30680 \begin_layout Description
30682 \begin_inset space ~
30686 \begin_inset space ~
30689 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
30690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30691 LatexCommand vpageref
30692 reference "fig:Two-images"
30697 \begin_inset Newline newline
30700 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
30701 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
30702 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
30703 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
30704 it prints “on the next page”.
30705 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
30708 \begin_layout Description
30710 \begin_inset space ~
30714 \begin_inset space ~
30718 \begin_inset space ~
30721 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
30722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30724 reference "fig:Two-images"
30729 \begin_inset Newline newline
30732 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
30738 ; otherwise it behaves like
30742 \begin_inset space ~
30746 \begin_inset space ~
30755 \begin_layout Description
30757 \begin_inset space ~
30760 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
30761 \begin_inset Newline newline
30765 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30773 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30783 \begin_inset Index idx
30786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30788 packages ! prettyref
30794 \begin_inset Index idx
30797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30799 packages ! refstyle
30810 \begin_inset Newline newline
30813 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
30814 -package should be used for this feature by setting
30817 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
30821 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30822 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30830 is the default and preferred because
30834 supports only English documents.
30835 The format is specified by using the command
30839 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
30848 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30849 preamble of the document.
30850 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
30852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30868 \begin_inset Newline newline
30875 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
30880 \begin_inset Newline newline
30891 predefines reference formats for all available types.
30892 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
30894 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
30895 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
30900 , you might do so as follows:
30901 \begin_inset Newline newline
30908 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
30909 format{prop}{Proposition
30914 \begin_inset Newline newline
30917 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
30918 the package documentation
30919 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30921 key "prettyref,refstyle"
30927 \begin_inset Newline newline
30938 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
30945 \begin_layout Description
30947 \begin_inset space ~
30950 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
30951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30952 LatexCommand nameref
30953 reference "fig:Two-images"
30960 \begin_layout Description
30962 \begin_inset space ~
30965 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30966 label for the reference:
30967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30968 LatexCommand labelonly
30969 reference "fig:Two-images"
30974 \begin_inset Newline newline
30977 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
30978 Code, if you want to issue a command
30979 that \SpecialChar LyX
30985 , then you may want to use the
30988 \begin_inset space ~
30993 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
30995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31003 This is the form needed for e.
31004 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31008 \begin_inset space \space{}
31015 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
31016 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31018 The varieties are adjusted in the field
31022 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
31026 \begin_layout Standard
31027 You can only use the style
31031 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
31035 is always possible.
31038 \begin_layout Standard
31039 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
31040 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
31042 Referencing formulas is explained in section
31043 \begin_inset space ~
31047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31049 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
31056 \begin_layout Standard
31057 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
31061 \begin_inset space ~
31065 \begin_inset space ~
31070 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
31071 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
31072 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding
31075 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
31078 \begin_inset space ~
31083 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
31084 You can also go back with the toolbar button
31087 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
31091 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
31092 or, using the menu:
31094 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
31095 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
31103 \begin_layout Standard
31104 You can change labels at any time.
31105 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
31107 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
31109 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
31110 change them all manually
31115 \begin_layout Standard
31116 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
31118 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
31122 \begin_layout Standard
31123 References are described in detail in the section
31134 \begin_layout Section
31135 Table of Contents and other Listings
31136 \begin_inset Index idx
31139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31146 \begin_inset Index idx
31149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31150 Navigating ! Outline
31156 \begin_inset Index idx
31159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31166 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31175 \begin_layout Subsection
31177 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31179 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
31186 \begin_layout Standard
31187 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
31189 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31190 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31192 \begin_inset space ~
31196 \begin_inset space ~
31202 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
31204 If you click on it, the
31208 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
31209 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
31210 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
31212 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
31214 \begin_inset space ~
31219 that is described in section
31220 \begin_inset space ~
31224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31226 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
31233 \begin_layout Standard
31234 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
31235 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
31237 \begin_inset space ~
31241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31243 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
31247 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
31249 \begin_inset space ~
31253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31255 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
31259 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
31261 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
31264 \begin_layout Subsection
31265 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
31266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31268 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
31275 \begin_layout Standard
31276 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
31278 You can insert them via the
31280 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31281 List/Contents/References
31284 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
31287 \begin_layout Section
31288 URLs and Hyperlinks
31289 \begin_inset Index idx
31292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31299 \begin_inset Index idx
31302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31311 \begin_layout Subsection
31313 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31322 \begin_layout Standard
31323 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
31325 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31331 \begin_layout Standard
31332 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
31334 \begin_inset Flex URL
31337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31339 https://www.lyx.org
31347 \begin_layout Standard
31348 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
31354 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
31358 \begin_layout Standard
31359 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31367 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
31376 \begin_layout Subsection
31378 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31380 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
31387 \begin_layout Standard
31388 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
31390 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31393 or with the toolbar button
31400 The appearing dialog has two fields:
31409 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
31410 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
31411 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31413 name "LyX's homepage"
31414 target "https://www.lyx.org"
31419 , an Email address like this:
31420 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31422 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
31423 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
31429 , or a link to a file.
31434 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31442 \begin_layout Standard
31443 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
31445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31456 to the link target.
31459 \begin_layout Standard
31460 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
31461 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
31462 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
31463 the text style dialog.
31464 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
31468 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31470 name "LyX's homepage"
31471 target "https://www.lyx.org"
31479 \begin_layout Standard
31480 The link text color can be changed, when the option
31484 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
31486 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31487 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31491 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
31493 \begin_inset Newline newline
31501 \begin_inset Newline newline
31508 in the PDF Properties dialog.
31509 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
31513 \begin_layout Section
31515 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
31517 \begin_inset Index idx
31520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31527 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31529 name "sec:Counters"
31536 \begin_layout Standard
31538 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
31539 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31540 is its ability to manage counters.
31541 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
31542 modify counters directly.
31543 This can be done in
31544 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500277
31546 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500277
31549 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
31550 using the counter inset, which is accessible from the Edit menu.
31551 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero);
31555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31557 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
31558 Note that the section counter, e.g., starts with its value at zero and then
31559 is incremented to one when the first section is created.
31560 So, if you want the next section to be section five, say, then you need
31561 to set the section counter to four.
31568 to add to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be
31569 negative); to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
31570 These effects can also be limited to
31571 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500332
31573 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500332
31576 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
31578 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in
31579 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500350
31581 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500350
31584 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
31588 \begin_layout Standard
31590 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
31591 There are five commands you can use:
31594 \begin_layout Enumerate
31596 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
31601 Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
31604 \begin_layout Enumerate
31606 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
31611 Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or to subtract, if
31612 you choose a negative number)
31615 \begin_layout Enumerate
31617 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
31622 Sets the value of the counter to 0.
31625 \begin_layout Enumerate
31627 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
31630 Save value of counter:
31632 Saves the value of the counter so that it can later be restored.
31635 \begin_layout Enumerate
31637 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
31640 Restore value of counter:
31642 Restores the previously saved value.
31645 \begin_layout Standard
31647 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
31648 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
31649 those that are available in the current document class.
31654 \begin_layout Section
31656 \begin_inset Index idx
31659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31668 name "sec:Appendices"
31675 \begin_layout Standard
31676 Appendices are created with the menu
31678 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31680 \begin_inset space ~
31684 \begin_inset space ~
31690 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
31691 as the appendix part of the book.
31692 This part is marked with a red borderline.
31695 \begin_layout Standard
31696 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
31697 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
31698 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
31699 and the subsection number.
31700 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
31704 \begin_layout Standard
31706 \begin_inset space ~
31710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31712 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
31720 \begin_inset space ~
31724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31726 reference "subsec:Export"
31733 \begin_layout Section
31735 \begin_inset Index idx
31738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31747 name "sec:Bibliography"
31754 \begin_layout Standard
31755 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
31757 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
31758 \begin_inset space ~
31762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31764 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31771 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
31776 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
31777 \begin_inset space ~
31781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31783 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
31788 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
31789 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
31790 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
31794 using a bibliography database.
31797 \begin_layout Standard
31798 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
31799 use two bibliographies in this document, a
31803 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
31804 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
31805 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
31806 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
31807 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
31810 \begin_layout Subsection
31811 The Bibliography Environment
31812 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31814 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31821 \begin_layout Standard
31826 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
31828 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
31837 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
31839 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
31840 of ASCII characters only.
31844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31846 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31849 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
31855 \begin_inset Newline newline
31859 \begin_inset Flex URL
31862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31864 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
31874 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
31877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31884 , a short form of its title, as the key.
31885 \begin_inset Newline newline
31892 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
31893 the number of the entry.
31898 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31907 \begin_layout Standard
31908 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
31910 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31913 or the toolbar button
31916 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
31920 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
31921 containing the available citations.
31922 Select one or more keys from the list and
31932 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
31933 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
31937 \begin_layout Standard
31938 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
31939 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
31940 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
31942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31952 \begin_layout Standard
31956 Companion Second Edition
31959 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31961 key "latexcompanion"
31969 \begin_layout Standard
31970 The \SpecialChar LyX
31971 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
31972 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31982 \begin_layout Standard
31983 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31990 \begin_inset Index idx
31993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32002 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
32003 the label needs to be given the form
32004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32015 Author A and Author B(Year)
32016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32023 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
32030 \begin_inset space ~
32035 in the document settings
32036 \begin_inset Index idx
32039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32040 Document ! Settings
32047 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
32049 \begin_inset space ~
32055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32057 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
32065 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
32067 Once you have done that, the
32070 \change_inserted 630872221 1621589258
32072 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
32075 dialog has three input fields instead of the
32092 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
32093 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
32094 These two are madatory.
32095 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
32098 Baker, Jones, and Williams
32100 ) and in abrreviated form (
32107 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
32108 add the abbreviated form to
32112 and the full list to the optional
32120 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
32121 If specified like this,
32123 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
32124 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
32127 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32134 is specified, toggling
32135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32142 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
32143 full and abbreviated list
32147 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
32148 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
32149 the citation references.
32150 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
32155 \begin_layout Standard
32156 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
32159 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32161 \begin_inset space ~
32169 arg "layout-paragraph"
32173 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
32176 \begin_layout Subsection
32177 Bibliography databases
32178 \begin_inset Index idx
32181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32182 Bibliography ! Databases
32188 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32190 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
32197 \begin_layout Standard
32198 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
32203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32204 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
32206 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
32207 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
32212 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
32214 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
32215 your working field in a database.
32216 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
32217 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
32218 list for that document.
32219 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
32223 \begin_layout Standard
32224 The database is a text file with the file extension
32225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32236 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
32237 The format is explained in
32238 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32245 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32247 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32249 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
32255 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
32256 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
32257 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
32259 \begin_inset Flex URL
32262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32264 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
32272 \begin_layout Standard
32274 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
32275 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32276 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
32278 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
32280 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
32281 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
32282 Those are addressed by
32287 \begin_inset Index idx
32290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32292 packages ! biblatex
32298 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32299 (although it has been significantly
32300 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32310 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32311 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32312 might conversely fail to correctly
32313 handle databases that use specific
32322 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
32326 \begin_layout Standard
32327 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32332 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
32334 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32338 \begin_inset Index idx
32341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32342 Document ! Settings
32354 \begin_inset space ~
32359 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32367 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32368 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32370 \begin_inset Index idx
32373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32374 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32383 \begin_layout Standard
32384 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32387 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32388 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32390 \begin_inset space ~
32396 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
32397 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32405 Add bibliography to TOC
32407 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
32412 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
32413 in the document or just the cited references.
32415 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
32420 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
32421 differ from the encoding of the document.
32426 \begin_layout Standard
32427 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32428 style file is a text file with the file extension
32429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32440 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
32441 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32442 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
32443 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
32445 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
32450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32451 For information on how this is done, have a look at
32452 \begin_inset Newline newline
32456 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32458 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
32468 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32473 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
32477 \begin_layout Standard
32478 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
32481 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32483 \begin_inset Index idx
32486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32487 Bibliography ! Biblatex
32493 \begin_inset Index idx
32496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32498 packages ! biblatex
32506 \begin_layout Standard
32507 Accessing a database via
32511 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32513 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599883
32515 \change_inserted 630872221 1621599883
32520 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32521 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32523 \begin_inset space ~
32529 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32530 you cannot select a
32535 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
32539 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32542 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
32543 As for the styles, note the following.
32548 \begin_layout Standard
32553 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
32555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32566 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
32567 file (text file with the file extension
32568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32579 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
32580 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
32582 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
32586 \begin_layout Standard
32591 styles are not set in the
32594 \begin_inset space ~
32599 dialog, but in the document settings.
32600 \begin_inset Index idx
32603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32604 Document ! Settings
32609 However, in the dialog in the
32613 field, which is only visible if you use
32617 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
32618 example how its heading will appear).
32619 These options are described in detail in the
32624 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32634 \begin_layout Standard
32635 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
32636 \begin_inset space ~
32640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32642 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32652 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32653 Bibliography Processors
32656 \begin_layout Standard
32657 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
32658 uses a bibliography processor,
32659 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
32660 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
32661 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32663 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
32664 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
32667 \begin_layout Standard
32668 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
32670 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
32671 You can do this on a general level in
32673 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32674 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32675 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32678 or for individual documents in
32680 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32681 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32685 The following variants are available by default:
32688 \begin_layout Description
32689 biber a specific, modern processor
32690 \begin_inset Index idx
32693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32700 developed exclusively for
32704 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32710 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
32715 makes use of; if you use the
32719 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
32726 \begin_layout Description
32727 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
32728 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
32729 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
32733 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
32736 \begin_layout Description
32737 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
32738 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
32742 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
32746 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
32750 features are supported.
32753 \begin_layout Standard
32754 By default (with the
32760 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32761 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32774 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32775 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32776 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32779 ), \SpecialChar LyX
32780 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
32793 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32794 -based bibliography styles).
32795 This should suit most needs.
32798 \begin_layout Standard
32799 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
32800 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
32801 (in \SpecialChar LyX
32806 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32807 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
32808 You can adjust it in
32810 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32811 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32812 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32818 \begin_layout Standard
32819 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
32820 can add below the selection.
32821 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
32822 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32828 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32838 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32842 \begin_layout Standard
32844 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
32846 These are explained in detail in section
32848 Customizing Bibliographies
32852 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32857 Additional Features
32860 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599958
32864 \begin_layout Subsection
32866 \begin_inset Index idx
32869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32870 Bibliography ! Citation format
32876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32878 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
32885 \begin_layout Standard
32886 Many different citation formats are common, e.
32887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32891 \begin_inset space \space{}
32894 numerical citation (as
32895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32902 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
32903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32910 ) or author-year citations (as
32911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32920 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
32924 \begin_layout Standard
32925 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
32928 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32929 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32933 \begin_inset Index idx
32936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32937 Document ! Settings
32942 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
32948 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
32949 labels, is there to use
32952 \begin_inset space ~
32963 \begin_inset space ~
32968 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
32969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32971 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32978 \begin_layout Standard
32979 With a bibliography database (see
32980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32982 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
32989 ) one has in contrary to the
32993 environment full access to the formatting styles.
32994 These style formats are available:
32997 \begin_layout Description
32999 \begin_inset space ~
33002 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33003 -based approached without any additional packages
33004 (simple numeric citations).
33007 \begin_layout Description
33008 Biblatex loads the package
33013 \begin_inset Index idx
33016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33018 packages ! biblatex
33023 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
33025 Biblatex citation style
33029 Biblatex bibliography style
33032 Options to the package
33036 can be entered in the
33043 \begin_layout Description
33045 \begin_inset space ~
33049 \begin_inset space ~
33052 mode) loads the package
33056 with the natbib compatibility mode.
33057 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
33069 behavior very closely.
33074 this option has some additional styles.
33079 styles are also supported by this variant.
33082 \begin_layout Description
33084 \begin_inset space ~
33087 (BibTeX) loads the package
33092 \begin_inset Index idx
33095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33102 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
33105 \begin_layout Description
33107 \begin_inset space ~
33110 (BibTeX) loads the package
33115 \begin_inset Index idx
33118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33125 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
33128 \begin_layout Standard
33137 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
33139 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
33148 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
33150 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
33151 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
33153 Biblatex citation style
33156 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
33162 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
33166 \begin_layout Standard
33167 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
33168 are available in the
33173 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
33174 a name prefix such as
33175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33190 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
33191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33195 \begin_inset space \space{}
33199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33210 \begin_layout Standard
33211 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
33213 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33217 \begin_inset space \space{}
33220 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
33222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33226 \begin_inset space \space{}
33230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33242 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
33246 \begin_inset space ~
33254 \begin_inset space ~
33260 Here is a simple example where the text
33261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33265 \begin_inset space ~
33269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33272 appears after the reference:
33275 \begin_layout Quote
33277 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33280 key "latexcompanion"
33288 \begin_layout Standard
33289 All styles except for
33293 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
33295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33303 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
33307 \begin_layout Standard
33308 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
33309 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
33310 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
33315 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
33316 multi-citation (so-called
33317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33320 qualified citation lists
33321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33327 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
33332 dialog will display three columns in the field
33339 \begin_inset space ~
33347 \begin_inset space ~
33355 \begin_inset space ~
33361 If you double-click on an item's
33364 \begin_inset space ~
33372 \begin_inset space ~
33377 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
33380 General text before
33386 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
33389 \begin_layout Subsection
33391 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
33392 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33394 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
33398 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
33402 \begin_layout Standard
33404 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
33406 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
33409 \begin_inset space ~
33413 \begin_inset space ~
33417 \begin_inset space ~
33421 \begin_inset space ~
33424 Content\SpecialChar ldots
33427 context menu if specific conditions are met:
33430 \begin_layout Itemize
33432 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
33433 If citation entries include any of the fields
33434 \begin_inset Flex Code
33437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33439 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33448 \begin_inset Flex Code
33451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33453 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33461 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
33462 \begin_inset Flex Code
33465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33467 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33475 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv, JSTOR, PubMed, HDL, Google Books
33476 \begin_inset Flex Code
33479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33481 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33489 ), the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
33492 \begin_layout Itemize
33494 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
33495 If citation entries include any of the fields
33496 \begin_inset Flex Code
33499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33501 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33509 (filled by JabRef) or
33510 \begin_inset Flex Code
33513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33515 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33523 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local
33524 drive, the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
33525 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
33528 \begin_layout Standard
33530 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
33531 In addition to that, \SpecialChar LyX
33532 also searches your disk for matching files if you
33535 Search drive for cited files
33539 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33540 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
33541 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33542 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33546 It uses the tokens supplied at
33550 in the same preferences section (by default: year and authors).
33551 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the
33552 \change_deleted 630872221 1621608311
33554 \change_inserted 630872221 1621608312
33556 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
33557 of the file (at arbitrary position).
33559 opens the first matching file it finds.
33560 This might or might not be the file you are looking for; the more systematic
33561 your file naming is, and the less ambiguous keywords you use, the greater
33562 the chance this works for you.
33567 \begin_layout Standard
33569 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
33570 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
33571 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33573 \begin_inset Flex Code
33576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33578 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
33587 \begin_inset Flex Code
33590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33592 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
33600 , but there are also special keys, which are documented in the
33602 Customization manual
33607 Cite format description
33614 \begin_layout Section
33616 \begin_inset Index idx
33619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33635 \begin_layout Standard
33636 An index entry is created if you use the menu
33638 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33640 \begin_inset space ~
33645 or the toolbar button
33652 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
33653 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
33654 by \SpecialChar LyX
33655 as the index entry.
33658 \begin_layout Standard
33659 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
33661 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33662 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33664 \begin_inset space ~
33670 A light blue box labeled
33671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33682 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
33683 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
33687 \begin_layout Standard
33688 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
33689 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33690 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
33691 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33693 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33695 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
33703 \begin_layout Subsection
33704 Grouping Index Entries
33705 \begin_inset Index idx
33708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33717 \begin_layout Standard
33718 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
33720 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
33721 lists under the entry
33722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33730 First we create the entry
33731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33739 \begin_inset space ~
33743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33745 reference "subsec:Lists"
33750 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
33751 \begin_inset space ~
33755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33757 reference "sec:Itemize"
33761 , we insert the command
33764 \begin_layout Standard
33770 \begin_layout Standard
33774 \begin_layout Standard
33780 \begin_layout Standard
33781 for the enumerated list in section
33782 \begin_inset space ~
33786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33788 reference "sec:Enumerate"
33795 \begin_layout Standard
33796 The exclamation mark
33797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33804 marks the grouping levels.
33805 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
33806 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
33807 If we don't have an index entry for
33808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33815 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
33818 \begin_layout Subsection
33820 \begin_inset Index idx
33823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33824 Index ! Page ranges
33832 \begin_layout Standard
33833 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
33835 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
33836 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
33837 an index entry in section
33838 \begin_inset space ~
33842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33844 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
33851 \begin_layout Standard
33854 Paragraph environments|(
33857 \begin_layout Standard
33858 and another entry at the end of section
33859 \begin_inset space ~
33863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33865 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
33872 \begin_layout Standard
33875 Paragraph environments|)
33878 \begin_layout Standard
33880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33903 respectively start and end the index range.
33904 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
33905 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
33906 the pages of the indexed document parts.
33907 An example is the index entry
33908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33911 Document ! Settings
33912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33918 \begin_layout Subsection
33920 \begin_inset Index idx
33923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33924 Index ! Cross referencing
33932 \begin_layout Standard
33933 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
33934 We referred for example in the index entry
33935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33943 \begin_inset space ~
33947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33949 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
33953 ) to the index entry
33954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33961 in the same section using the entry
33964 \begin_layout Standard
33967 GIF|see{Image formats}
33970 \begin_layout Standard
33971 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33973 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
33974 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
33977 \begin_layout Subsection
33979 \begin_inset Index idx
33982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33983 Index ! Entry order
33991 \begin_layout Standard
33992 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
33993 follow the rules for the index order.
33994 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
33999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34000 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
34002 \begin_inset space ~
34006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34008 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
34017 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
34018 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
34019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34043 \begin_inset Index idx
34046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34047 Dummy entries ! maïs
34053 \begin_inset Index idx
34056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34057 Dummy entries ! maître
34063 \begin_inset Index idx
34066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34067 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
34072 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
34073 maïs, maison, maître.
34074 To achieve this, we use the command
34077 \begin_layout Standard
34080 previous entry@current entry
34083 \begin_layout Standard
34084 In our case we want to have
34085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34100 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
34103 \begin_layout Standard
34109 \begin_layout Standard
34110 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
34111 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
34113 See the next subsection for an example.
34116 \begin_layout Subsection
34118 \begin_inset Index idx
34121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34122 Index ! Entry layout
34130 \begin_layout Standard
34131 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
34132 \begin_inset Index idx
34135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34138 This is an italic dummy entry
34143 You can also format the page number using the character
34144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34151 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34152 -command without a backslash.
34153 We can write for example
34156 \begin_layout Standard
34159 italic page number:|textit
34162 \begin_layout Standard
34163 to get the page number in italic.
34164 \begin_inset Index idx
34167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34168 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
34173 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
34174 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
34176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34192 \begin_inset space ~
34198 Have a look at section
34199 \begin_inset space ~
34203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34205 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34209 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34213 \begin_layout Standard
34214 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34222 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
34226 to generate the index, see section
34227 \begin_inset space ~
34231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34233 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
34242 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
34247 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
34248 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34251 key "latexcompanion"
34264 \begin_layout Standard
34265 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
34267 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
34268 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
34269 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
34270 If so, put the following in the preamble
34273 \begin_layout Standard
34285 \begin_layout Standard
34289 \begin_layout Standard
34295 \begin_layout Standard
34296 in the index entry.
34297 \begin_inset Index idx
34300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34301 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
34306 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
34307 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
34308 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
34311 \begin_layout Standard
34312 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
34313 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
34314 a bold font for all index entries.
34315 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
34327 documentation for details,
34328 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34330 key "makeindex,xindy"
34338 \begin_layout Subsection
34340 \begin_inset Index idx
34343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34350 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34352 name "subsec:Index-Program"
34359 \begin_layout Standard
34360 If the index generation program
34364 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
34365 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
34369 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
34370 distribution, is used.
34374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34379 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
34380 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
34381 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
34382 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
34383 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
34393 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
34395 dialog, see section
34396 \begin_inset space ~
34400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34402 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
34407 The available options are listed and explained in
34408 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34410 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
34416 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
34420 \begin_layout Standard
34421 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
34422 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
34425 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34426 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34430 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
34431 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
34434 \begin_layout Subsection
34438 \begin_layout Standard
34439 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
34440 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
34441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34448 next to the standard index.
34450 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
34451 that add this feature.
34458 \begin_inset Index idx
34461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34463 packages ! splitidx
34468 package to generate multiple indexes.
34469 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
34474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34475 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
34477 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34485 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34486 style, but it also includes
34487 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
34488 Please consult the package's manual for details.
34496 \begin_layout Standard
34497 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
34498 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
34500 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34501 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34504 and select the option
34506 Use multiple Indexes
34513 already contains the standard index
34514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34522 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
34523 also appear as a heading) to the
34527 input field and press the
34532 The new index now also appears in the list.
34533 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
34534 label color to the new index.
34537 \begin_layout Standard
34538 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
34541 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34542 List/Contents/References
34548 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
34549 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
34550 are additional features:
34553 \begin_layout Itemize
34554 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
34555 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
34558 \begin_layout Itemize
34559 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
34560 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
34565 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
34566 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
34567 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
34568 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
34571 \begin_layout Itemize
34576 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
34577 code in the name of the index.
34580 \begin_layout Section
34581 Nomenclature/Glossary
34582 \begin_inset Index idx
34585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34592 \begin_inset Index idx
34595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34626 name "sec:Nomenclature"
34633 \begin_layout Standard
34634 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
34635 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
34636 called nomenclature or glossary.
34639 \begin_layout Standard
34640 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34647 \begin_inset Index idx
34650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34658 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34660 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34667 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34671 \begin_layout Standard
34672 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
34673 and then use the menu
34675 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34681 \begin_inset space ~
34686 or the toolbar button
34689 arg "nomencl-insert"
34694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34705 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
34708 \begin_layout Standard
34709 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
34710 The first is the term or
34714 that you wish to define.
34719 of the term or symbol.
34722 \begin_layout Standard
34723 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34731 To use \SpecialChar TeX
34732 code for nomenclature entries the option
34736 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
34744 \begin_layout Subsection
34745 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
34746 \begin_inset Index idx
34749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34750 Nomenclature ! Layout
34758 \begin_layout Standard
34759 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
34763 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
34766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34770 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34778 \begin_inset Newline newline
34786 \begin_inset Newline newline
34792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34799 character starts/ends the formula.
34800 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34801 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
34803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34813 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
34823 \begin_layout Standard
34824 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34825 syntax is given in section
34826 \begin_inset space ~
34830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34832 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34839 \begin_layout Standard
34843 \begin_inset space ~
34848 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
34850 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
34851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34855 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34862 in this document is:
34863 \begin_inset Newline newline
34868 dummy entry for the character
34873 \begin_inset Newline newline
34885 \begin_inset space ~
34895 font use the command
34924 \begin_layout Standard
34925 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
34926 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34930 \begin_inset space \space{}
34934 \begin_inset Newline newline
34950 \begin_inset Newline newline
34953 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
34954 This command will make the font of all symbols
34961 \begin_inset space ~
34969 \begin_layout Standard
34970 If the characters |
34971 \begin_inset space \space{}
34975 \begin_inset space \space{}
34979 \begin_inset space \space{}
34983 \begin_inset space \space{}
34987 \begin_inset space \space{}
34990 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
34991 code they need to be escaped
34993 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611122
34995 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611123
34998 character in front of them.
34999 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611807
35001 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
35002 LatexCommand nomenclature
35003 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
35004 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
35010 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611114
35012 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
35013 LatexCommand nomenclature
35014 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
35015 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
35025 \begin_layout Subsection
35026 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
35027 \begin_inset Index idx
35030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35031 Nomenclature ! Sort order
35039 \begin_layout Standard
35040 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35041 -code of the symbol
35043 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
35045 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
35048 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
35049 LatexCommand nomenclature
35051 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
35059 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
35063 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
35064 LatexCommand nomenclature
35067 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
35073 They will be sorted by
35074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35100 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
35103 will be sorted before the
35107 since the character
35108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35115 is considered in sorting.
35118 \begin_layout Standard
35119 To control the sort order, you can edit the
35122 \begin_inset space ~
35127 field of the nomenclature dialog.
35128 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
35130 For the example given, you can insert
35134 in this field for the
35135 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
35142 will be located before
35143 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
35149 \begin_layout Standard
35150 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
35155 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35165 \begin_layout Subsection
35166 Nomenclature Options
35167 \begin_inset Index idx
35170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35171 Nomenclature ! Options
35177 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35179 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
35186 \begin_layout Standard
35191 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
35192 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
35195 \begin_layout Description
35196 refeq Appends the phrase
35197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35212 to every nomenclature entry, where
35218 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
35221 \begin_layout Description
35222 refpage Appends the phrase
35223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35238 to every nomenclature entry, where
35244 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
35247 \begin_layout Description
35248 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
35251 \begin_layout Standard
35252 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
35253 class options list in the
35255 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35259 In this document the options
35266 \begin_layout Standard
35267 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35273 \begin_layout Standard
35274 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
35275 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
35280 field in the nomenclature dialog:
35283 \begin_layout Description
35293 \begin_layout Description
35296 nomrefpage Like the
35303 \begin_layout Description
35306 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
35315 \begin_layout Description
35319 \begin_inset space ~
35325 \begin_inset space ~
35330 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
35333 \begin_layout Standard
35335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35342 are automatically translated for most document languages.
35343 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
35347 \begin_layout Standard
35356 \begin_inset Newline newline
35362 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
35365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35366 \begin_inset space ~
35378 unskip, see equation
35381 \begin_inset Newline newline
35388 pagedeclaration}[1]{
35389 \begin_inset Newline newline
35395 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
35398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35399 \begin_inset space ~
35416 \begin_layout Standard
35417 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
35420 \begin_inset space ~
35425 in the document settings under
35428 \begin_inset space ~
35436 \begin_layout Standard
35444 \begin_inset Newline newline
35448 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
35451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35452 \begin_inset space ~
35464 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
35466 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
35467 \begin_inset Newline newline
35474 pagedeclaration}[1]{
35475 \begin_inset Newline newline
35479 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
35482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35483 \begin_inset space ~
35495 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
35500 \begin_layout Subsection
35501 Printing the Nomenclature
35502 \begin_inset Index idx
35505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35506 Nomenclature ! Printing
35514 \begin_layout Standard
35515 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
35517 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35518 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
35523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35534 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
35535 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
35536 You can choose between these settings:
35539 \begin_layout Description
35540 Default a space of 1
35541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35547 \begin_layout Description
35549 \begin_inset space ~
35553 \begin_inset space ~
35556 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
35559 \begin_layout Description
35560 Custom custom space
35563 \begin_layout Standard
35564 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
35565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35573 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
35581 For example, in order to change the name to
35585 , add the following line to the preamble:
35588 \begin_layout Standard
35601 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
35604 \begin_layout Standard
35605 When you are using another document language than English, replace
35606 \begin_inset Newline newline
35621 , where *** is the name of the language used.
35624 \begin_layout Subsection
35625 Nomenclature Program
35626 \begin_inset Index idx
35629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35630 Nomenclature ! Program
35636 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35638 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
35645 \begin_layout Standard
35651 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
35652 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
35654 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
35659 by adding options, see section
35660 \begin_inset space ~
35664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35666 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
35671 The available options are listed and explained in
35672 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35674 key "nomencl,makeindex"
35682 \begin_layout Section
35684 \begin_inset Index idx
35687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35694 \begin_inset Index idx
35697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35698 Document ! Branches
35704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35706 name "sec:Branches"
35713 \begin_layout Standard
35714 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
35715 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
35716 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
35717 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
35720 \begin_layout Standard
35721 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
35722 allows you to put text into branches.
35723 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
35724 To create a branch, either select the menu
35726 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35727 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
35730 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
35732 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35739 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
35740 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
35741 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
35742 and whether the name of the branch should
35743 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
35744 (see below for an example).
35745 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
35746 to the name of the other) and to add
35747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35755 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35759 \begin_inset space ~
35762 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
35763 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
35766 \begin_layout Standard
35767 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
35768 These boxes are inserted via the menu
35770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35773 where you can choose a branch.
35774 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
35778 \begin_layout Standard
35779 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
35780 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
35783 \begin_layout Standard
35784 \begin_inset Branch Question
35788 \begin_layout Standard
35793 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
35801 \begin_layout Standard
35802 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35806 \begin_layout Standard
35811 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
35819 \begin_layout Standard
35826 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35827 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35830 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
35831 Consider for example a file
35832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35839 which has the above branches.
35841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35848 is active, the PDF export file would be called
35849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35872 branch were inactive,
35873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35888 branch was active, likewise
35889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35904 branch was active, and
35905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35908 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
35909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35912 if both branches were active.
35913 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
35914 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35920 \begin_layout Standard
35922 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147989
35923 It is also possible to
35924 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147965
35928 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147967
35930 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147977
35933 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
35938 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284375
35939 (they are marked with ~ before the name)
35943 \change_deleted 244031559 1635284383
35945 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284385
35948 make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
35949 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
35953 \begin_inset space ~
35961 \begin_layout Standard
35962 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35966 \begin_layout Standard
35972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35979 branch is deactivated.
35985 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35991 \begin_layout Standard
35992 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
35993 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
35994 definitions for each branch.
35995 For example you can define for the question branch
35999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36000 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36001 -syntax, see section
36002 \begin_inset space ~
36006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36008 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
36020 \begin_layout Standard
36030 \begin_layout Standard
36040 \begin_layout Standard
36041 and for the answer branch
36044 \begin_layout Standard
36054 \begin_layout Standard
36064 \begin_layout Standard
36065 \begin_inset Branch Question
36069 \begin_layout Standard
36073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36101 \begin_layout Standard
36102 \begin_inset Branch Answer
36106 \begin_layout Standard
36110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36138 \begin_layout Standard
36139 Now it is possible to use the
36143 question{\SpecialChar ldots
36150 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
36153 commands to obtain conditional output.
36154 Here is an example formula where only the
36161 \begin_inset Formula
36163 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
36171 \begin_layout Standard
36172 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
36180 \begin_layout Standard
36181 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
36183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36187 \begin_inset space \space{}
36190 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
36192 For this advanced usage, see the
36198 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36201 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148012
36205 \begin_layout Standard
36207 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
36208 In case one extensively needs syncing activation branch status with open/close
36209 status of all branch insets in the document we provide
36214 function, which can be bound to keyboard shortcut or added to user-defined
36215 context menu of branch inset.
36220 \begin_layout Section
36222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36224 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
36229 \begin_inset Index idx
36232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36241 \begin_layout Standard
36243 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655914
36248 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36249 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36253 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655917
36256 allows you to set up
36257 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651900
36259 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651929
36263 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651937
36265 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651944
36269 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655939
36273 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651948
36278 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651614
36280 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651616
36284 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651959
36286 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651961
36289 are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36291 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651813
36293 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651814
36301 \begin_inset Index idx
36304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36306 packages ! hyperref
36312 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653717
36313 which you need to enable by clicking
36315 Use Hyperref Support
36317 in order to set the PDF properties (if the package is already loaded by
36318 your document class or another package, the checkbox you need to click
36321 Customize Hyperref Options
36324 Among other things, hyperref
36325 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651887
36329 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653821
36331 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653851
36335 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653826
36339 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653859
36342 cross-references in the
36343 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653786
36347 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653751
36349 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653751
36353 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
36354 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653878
36357 table of contents entry or on a reference to
36358 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653918
36359 open a website or to
36361 move to the cross-referenced part of the document.
36363 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653971
36364 Furthermore, you can set PDF metadata (such as document author and title),
36365 or determine how the PDF is being opened by the reader program.
36370 \begin_layout Standard
36371 The header information in the dialog tab
36375 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
36376 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example,
36377 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656745
36380 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
36381 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
36385 \begin_inset space ~
36389 \begin_inset space ~
36395 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654039
36398 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654041
36401 tries to extract the header information from your document title and author
36406 \begin_inset space ~
36410 \begin_inset space ~
36414 \begin_inset space ~
36419 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
36422 \begin_layout Standard
36424 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654066
36426 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654066
36434 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654103
36435 you can customize the
36436 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654105
36438 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654109
36442 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654087
36444 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654087
36448 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654147
36449 , and you can specify
36452 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654275
36454 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654283
36455 will look and if links for
36457 bibliographical backreferences are created
36458 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654335
36464 are links inserted at the end of bibliographic entries pointing to either
36465 sections, pages or slides on which these entries are being cited
36471 \begin_inset space ~
36475 \begin_inset space ~
36479 \begin_inset space ~
36484 option allows long links to be split;
36487 \begin_inset space ~
36491 \begin_inset space ~
36495 \begin_inset space ~
36503 \begin_inset space ~
36508 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
36511 \begin_inset space ~
36516 colors the different links.
36517 The default colors are:
36520 \begin_layout Labeling
36521 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
36526 for hyperlinks and URLs
36529 \begin_layout Labeling
36530 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
36538 \begin_layout Labeling
36539 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
36547 \begin_layout Standard
36548 but you can change these in the
36549 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651692
36551 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651692
36557 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656056
36559 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656056
36565 For example, in this document they were changed with the
36566 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651709
36570 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651730
36580 \begin_layout Quote
36583 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
36586 \begin_layout Standard
36588 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654422
36593 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
36594 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
36595 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
36600 \begin_layout Standard
36605 you can specify if PDF
36606 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654456
36608 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654456
36612 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654511
36613 (shown as a collapsible outline in the PDF reader)
36615 should be created for every section of your document to make it easier for
36616 readers to navigate through the document.
36617 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
36620 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654607
36622 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654609
36626 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654594
36632 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654550
36634 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654551
36636 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654802
36639 you can instruct the PDF reader to uncollapse the outliner when opening
36648 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654838
36649 determines up to which level this uncollapsing is done.
36650 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654687
36651 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
36652 when opening the PDF.
36656 \begin_inset space ~
36659 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
36660 \begin_inset space ~
36663 1 will only display the sections
36664 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654724
36665 (collapsing the rest)
36668 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656154
36672 \begin_layout Standard
36674 \change_inserted -712698321 1644657105
36679 dialog tab you can insert hyperref options which are not among the ones
36680 described above as a comma-separated list (please refer to the hyperref
36682 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36689 for a full list and documentation of possible options).
36690 Note that these options will be passed to hyperref via
36691 \begin_inset Flex Code
36694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36696 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656321
36706 , not via the package options.
36707 This will exclude some options that can only be specified via the latter.
36708 If you need to use one of those options, you can set them by adding
36711 \begin_layout Quote
36713 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656496
36716 PackageOptions hyperref option1,option
36717 \change_deleted 274215730 1652836969
36719 \change_inserted 274215730 1652836970
36725 \begin_layout Standard
36727 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656431
36730 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36731 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36734 (but only if hyperref is not loaded by your document class).
36739 \begin_layout Standard
36741 \change_inserted -712698321 1644744249
36746 input widget allows you to insert PDF properties that are independent of
36747 the hyperref package and rely on some (rather new) \SpecialChar LaTeX
36749 This requires \SpecialChar LaTeX
36750 version 06/2022 at least (with earlier versions, input is
36752 The widget expects a comma-separated list of key-value options (such as
36755 pdfversion=1.7, lang=de-DE
36758 At the point of writing this, the list of options is still rather small
36759 and not very well documented (look for a file called
36761 documentmetadata-support.pdf
36763 ), but it is expected that in the future, rather fundamental PDF properties
36764 (such as structure tagging for accessibility reasons and different PDF
36765 standards such as PDF/A) can be set this way.
36768 \begin_layout Standard
36770 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656978
36771 PDF properties are also used in this document.
36772 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
36778 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
36779 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36791 \begin_layout Section
36793 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36795 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36797 name "sec:TeX-Code"
36804 \begin_layout Subsection
36807 \begin_inset Index idx
36810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36820 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36827 \begin_layout Standard
36828 As \SpecialChar LyX
36829 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
36830 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
36831 commands and constructs,
36834 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
36835 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
36836 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
36837 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36838 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
36839 cannot support all packages and
36843 \begin_layout Standard
36844 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
36845 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
36846 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
36850 Code box is created by the menu
36852 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36854 \begin_inset space ~
36859 or by the toolbar button
36872 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
36880 \begin_layout Standard
36881 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
36883 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
36885 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
36889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36890 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
36895 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36902 , you can write the command part
36908 in a \SpecialChar TeX
36909 Code box before the word and the closing brace
36913 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
36914 Code box behind the word.
36915 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
36916 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
36920 \begin_layout Standard
36921 \begin_inset Graphics
36922 filename clipart/ERT.png
36930 \begin_layout Standard
36934 \begin_layout Standard
36935 This is a line with a
36939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36962 \begin_layout Standard
36963 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36971 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36972 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
36973 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
36974 know that the command is finished.
36982 \begin_layout Subsection
36983 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36985 \begin_inset Argument 1
36988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36989 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
36996 \begin_inset Index idx
36999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37007 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37009 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
37016 \begin_layout Standard
37017 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
37018 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37019 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
37020 uses in the background.
37021 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
37022 is based on commands, you can
37023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37031 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
37032 any time if you know the right commands.
37033 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
37034 is the end of the day.
37035 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
37036 all caption labels bold.
37037 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
37039 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
37043 \begin_layout Standard
37044 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
37046 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
37048 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37051 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37061 \begin_layout Standard
37062 As result you find that the package
37067 \begin_inset Index idx
37070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37078 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
37080 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37083 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37087 \begin_inset space ~
37095 \begin_layout Standard
37100 usepackage[options]{package name}
37103 \begin_layout Standard
37104 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
37105 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
37106 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
37107 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
37110 \begin_layout Standard
37111 In your case the package name is
37116 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
37121 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
37122 So you add the command
37125 \begin_layout Standard
37130 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
37133 \begin_layout Standard
37134 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
37138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37139 For more commands provided by the
37143 package, have a look at its documentation,
37144 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37159 \begin_layout Standard
37160 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
37162 For example if you use a
37166 class, you don't need the package
37170 , you can instead write
37173 \begin_layout Standard
37178 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
37183 \begin_layout Standard
37184 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
37185 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
37186 documentation of the document class you want to use.
37193 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
37196 \begin_layout Standard
37197 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
37198 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
37200 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
37201 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
37202 Code box as described in the previous
37206 \begin_layout Standard
37207 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
37208 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37211 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37213 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
37221 \begin_layout Standard
37222 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
37228 \begin_layout Standard
37232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37242 \begin_inset Note Note
37245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37246 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
37254 \begin_layout Left Header
37255 \begin_inset Argument 1
37258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37278 \begin_inset Note Note
37281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37282 defines the header line as described below
37290 \begin_layout Center Header
37291 \begin_inset Argument 1
37294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37303 \begin_layout Right Header
37304 \begin_inset Argument 1
37307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37328 \begin_layout Left Footer
37329 \begin_inset Argument 1
37332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37353 \begin_layout Center Footer
37354 \begin_inset Argument 1
37357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37369 \begin_inset Newline newline
37373 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
37379 \begin_layout Right Footer
37380 \begin_inset Argument 1
37383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37405 \begin_layout Section
37406 Customized Page Headers and Footers
37407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37409 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
37414 \begin_inset Index idx
37417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37418 Document ! Header/Footer line
37424 \begin_inset Index idx
37427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37436 \begin_layout Standard
37437 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
37441 \begin_inset space ~
37452 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37458 \begin_inset space ~
37464 As a second step add in the menu
37466 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37467 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37476 Custom Header/Footerlines
37479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37483 This module offers the following 6
37484 \begin_inset space ~
37490 \begin_layout Description
37492 \begin_inset space ~
37496 \begin_inset space ~
37500 \begin_inset space ~
37504 \begin_inset space ~
37508 \begin_inset space ~
37514 \begin_layout Description
37516 \begin_inset space ~
37520 \begin_inset space ~
37524 \begin_inset space ~
37528 \begin_inset space ~
37532 \begin_inset space ~
37538 \begin_layout Standard
37539 for the different positions in the header/footer.
37540 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
37543 \begin_layout Standard
37544 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
37545 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
37547 \begin_inset space ~
37551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37553 reference "fig:Page-layout"
37557 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
37560 \begin_layout Standard
37561 \begin_inset Float figure
37568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37571 \begin_inset Tabular
37572 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
37573 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
37574 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
37575 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
37576 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
37578 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
37590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37596 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37607 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37625 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37636 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
37639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37640 The normal text on the page goes here.
37641 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
37643 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
37644 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
37649 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37658 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37669 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37687 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37698 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
37710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37716 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37734 \begin_inset Caption Standard
37736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37739 name "fig:Page-layout"
37743 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
37756 \begin_layout Standard
37757 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37765 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
37769 \begin_inset space ~
37774 is set to “Default”.
37775 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
37784 \begin_layout Subsection
37788 \begin_layout Standard
37789 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
37790 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
37791 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
37792 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
37794 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
37796 Defining the footer line works similarly.
37799 \begin_layout Standard
37800 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
37801 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
37805 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37807 \begin_inset space ~
37815 \begin_layout Description
37818 thepage prints the current page number
37821 \begin_layout Description
37824 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
37827 \begin_layout Description
37830 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
37833 \begin_layout Description
37836 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
37837 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
37840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37844 \begin_inset Quotes prd
37847 because it usually goes in a left header.
37850 \begin_layout Description
37853 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
37854 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
37856 It is normally used in the right header.
37859 \begin_layout Subsection
37860 Default header/footer
37863 \begin_layout Standard
37864 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
37865 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
37866 footer has the page number.
37867 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
37868 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
37869 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
37872 \begin_inset space ~
37880 \begin_layout Subsection
37884 \begin_layout Standard
37885 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
37886 Some pages are different.
37887 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
37888 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
37889 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
37890 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
37891 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
37894 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37895 Header and footer decoration line
37898 \begin_layout Standard
37899 By default, you get a 0.4
37900 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37903 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
37904 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
37916 in the following way:
37919 \begin_layout Standard
37926 headrulewidth}{thickness}
37929 \begin_layout Standard
37930 where thickness is a size in standard units like
37943 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
37944 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37950 \begin_layout Standard
37951 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
37953 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
37954 \begin_inset space ~
37958 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37968 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37969 Several header/footer lines
37972 \begin_layout Standard
37973 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
37974 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
37975 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
37977 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37992 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37993 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37995 \begin_inset space ~
38003 \begin_layout Standard
38010 headheight}{height}
38013 \begin_layout Standard
38018 is a size in standard units (e.
38019 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38023 \begin_inset space \space{}
38031 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
38032 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
38033 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38034 logfile with the menu
38036 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38038 \begin_inset space ~
38046 \begin_inset space ~
38051 to see if you can find a warning about the package
38056 \begin_inset Index idx
38059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38061 packages ! fancyhdr
38067 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
38068 for your header/footer.
38071 \begin_layout Subsection
38075 \begin_layout Standard
38076 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
38077 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
38078 This example consists of the following definition:
38081 \begin_layout Description
38083 \begin_inset space ~
38092 , empty optional argument
38095 \begin_layout Description
38097 \begin_inset space ~
38100 Header empty, empty optional argument
38103 \begin_layout Description
38105 \begin_inset space ~
38114 in the optional argument
38117 \begin_layout Description
38119 \begin_inset space ~
38128 in the optional argument
38131 \begin_layout Description
38133 \begin_inset space ~
38146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38150 \begin_inset Newline newline
38154 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
38158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38161 in the optional argument
38164 \begin_layout Description
38166 \begin_inset space ~
38175 , empty optional argument
38178 \begin_layout Description
38181 headrulewidth set to 2
38182 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38188 \begin_layout Standard
38189 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
38190 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
38196 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38206 \begin_layout Standard
38207 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
38213 \begin_layout Standard
38217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38221 pagestyle{headings}
38227 \begin_inset Note Note
38230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38231 switches back to page style with the default headings
38239 \begin_layout Section
38240 Previewing Snippets of your Document
38241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38243 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38248 \begin_inset Index idx
38251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38258 \begin_inset Index idx
38261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38270 \begin_layout Standard
38272 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
38273 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
38274 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
38277 \begin_layout Subsection
38281 \begin_layout Standard
38282 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38288 \begin_inset Index idx
38291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38293 packages ! preview-latex
38298 (on some systems named simply
38303 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38305 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38312 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38314 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
38322 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
38323 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38324 -package are automatically
38325 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
38329 \begin_layout Subsection
38333 \begin_layout Standard
38334 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
38335 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
38337 activate the option
38340 \begin_inset space ~
38347 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38353 \begin_inset space ~
38357 \begin_inset space ~
38360 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
38367 \begin_inset space ~
38380 \begin_inset space ~
38385 is the multiplication factor for the size.
38388 \begin_layout Standard
38389 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
38394 \begin_inset space ~
38402 \begin_inset space ~
38410 \begin_layout Standard
38411 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
38412 and when you finish
38416 \begin_layout Standard
38417 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38425 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
38426 generated by activating the option
38429 \begin_inset space ~
38435 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
38443 \begin_layout Subsection
38444 Selected document parts
38447 \begin_layout Standard
38448 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
38449 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
38450 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
38451 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
38453 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
38455 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38459 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
38460 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
38461 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
38464 \begin_layout Standard
38465 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38472 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
38477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38484 is explained in section
38486 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
38491 \begin_inset space ~
38501 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
38502 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
38503 the final rotated boxes,
38504 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
38505 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
38507 Here is the result:
38510 \begin_layout Standard
38511 \begin_inset Preview
38513 \begin_layout Standard
38518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38522 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
38528 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
38538 height_special "totalheight"
38543 backgroundcolor "none"
38546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38571 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
38577 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
38584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38599 \begin_layout Standard
38600 Previewing works also for colors.
38601 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38620 is explained in section
38627 \begin_inset space ~
38640 \begin_layout Standard
38641 \begin_inset Preview
38643 \begin_layout Standard
38647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38666 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
38671 This is text within a colored, framed box.
38675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38690 \begin_layout Standard
38691 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
38697 \begin_layout Standard
38698 If \SpecialChar LyX
38699 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
38700 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
38701 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
38702 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38703 packages in your document preamble that are required by
38704 the \SpecialChar TeX
38706 If \SpecialChar LyX
38707 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
38708 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
38710 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
38711 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
38712 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
38715 \begin_layout Subsection
38720 \begin_layout Standard
38721 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38722 source of the whole document or parts of it.
38725 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38727 \begin_inset space ~
38732 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38734 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
38736 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
38737 's main window, then only this selection
38738 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
38739 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
38740 the source view window.
38745 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
38746 ; but note that if you have
38747 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
38749 not just the one which is open at the time.
38752 \begin_layout Section
38753 Advanced Find and Replace
38754 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38756 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
38761 \begin_inset Index idx
38764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38771 \begin_inset Index idx
38774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38783 \begin_layout Subsection
38787 \begin_layout Standard
38788 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
38789 allows for searching of complex,
38790 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
38792 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
38793 The key-features are:
38796 \begin_layout Itemize
38797 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
38798 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
38799 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
38803 \begin_layout Itemize
38804 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
38805 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
38806 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
38807 a section heading will only be found within section headings
38810 \begin_layout Itemize
38811 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
38812 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
38813 outside of mathematics environments
38816 \begin_layout Itemize
38817 Search may be widened to a specific
38822 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38826 \begin_inset space ~
38829 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
38830 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
38837 \begin_layout Itemize
38838 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
38839 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
38840 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38844 \begin_inset space ~
38847 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
38850 \begin_layout Subsection
38854 \begin_layout Standard
38855 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
38857 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38870 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
38873 ) or the toolbar button
38876 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38882 Advanced Find and Replace
38887 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38891 \begin_layout Standard
38897 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
38901 \begin_inset space ~
38906 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
38909 arg "paragraph-break"
38913 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
38914 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
38918 arg "paragraph-break"
38921 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
38925 searches backwards.
38928 \begin_layout Standard
38932 \begin_inset space ~
38937 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
38946 \begin_inset space ~
38951 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
38954 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38955 Searching for mathematics
38958 \begin_layout Standard
38959 Mathematical formulas, such as
38960 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
38963 or something more complex like
38964 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
38967 , may be searched for by typing them in the
38972 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
38973 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
38974 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
38975 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
38981 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38985 \begin_layout Standard
38986 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
38987 This is done by switching to the
38991 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
38996 This way, entering in the
39003 \begin_layout Itemize
39004 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
39005 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
39008 \begin_layout Itemize
39009 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
39010 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
39013 \begin_layout Itemize
39014 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
39015 of it only within section headings.
39016 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
39017 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
39021 \begin_layout Itemize
39022 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
39023 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
39026 \begin_layout Subsubsection
39030 \begin_layout Standard
39031 The entries made in the
39035 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
39038 \begin_inset space ~
39044 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
39048 button or alternatively press
39051 arg "paragraph-break"
39058 while the cursor is in the
39061 \begin_inset space ~
39069 \begin_layout Standard
39070 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
39072 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
39076 \begin_layout Itemize
39077 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
39078 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
39079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39086 with its typewriter version
39087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39101 \begin_layout Itemize
39102 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
39104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39108 \begin_inset Formula $R$
39112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39120 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
39124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39127 (you may want to enable the
39130 \begin_inset space ~
39138 \begin_inset space ~
39143 options and disable the
39151 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
39152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39159 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
39160 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
39164 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
39167 , or occurrences of
39168 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
39172 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
39178 \begin_layout Subsubsection
39182 \begin_layout Standard
39183 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
39187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39188 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
39190 \begin_inset CommandInset href
39192 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
39202 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
39208 This is done with the context menu
39210 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39211 Insert Regular Expression
39213 while the cursor is in the
39218 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
39219 expression matching rules
39223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39224 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
39227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39231 \begin_inset space ~
39234 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
39235 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
39241 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
39242 same text in the document.
39243 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
39244 Examples of using such a feature may be:
39247 \begin_layout Enumerate
39248 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
39253 editor the fraction
39254 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
39258 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
39261 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
39262 fractions with the given denominator.
39265 \begin_layout Enumerate
39266 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after
39267 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390777
39271 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390710
39274 'Adhere to search string formatting of'
39275 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390724
39281 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
39282 and the 'Select all'
39291 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
39296 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
39297 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
39298 Also, by inserting a
39299 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
39302 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
39303 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
39305 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391772
39306 The meaning of the specific style options (if checked) is as follows:
39310 \begin_layout Description
39312 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391862
39313 Language Allows searching for text in specific language
39316 \begin_layout Description
39318 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392163
39320 \begin_inset space ~
39323 color colored text like cyan, yellow, etc
39326 \begin_layout Description
39328 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392038
39330 \begin_inset space ~
39333 family Roman, Sans serif, Typewriter
39336 \begin_layout Description
39338 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392204
39340 \begin_inset space ~
39347 \begin_layout Description
39349 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392249
39351 \begin_inset space ~
39355 upright, italic, ...
39358 \begin_layout Description
39360 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392299
39362 \begin_inset space ~
39369 \begin_layout Description
39371 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392343
39372 Emph/noun Semantic Markup: Emphasized, Noun
39375 \begin_layout Description
39377 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392414
39379 Single, Double, Wawy
39382 \begin_layout Description
39384 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392503
39385 Strike-through Single, With '/'
39388 \begin_layout Description
39390 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392776
39391 Deletion searches also in deleted parts (in case of 'Track Changes' enabled)
39394 \begin_layout Description
39396 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392891
39398 \begin_inset space ~
39402 title, part, chapter, section, ...
39407 \begin_layout Standard
39408 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
39409 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
39410 \begin_inset Formula $()$
39413 , and referring back to them through
39414 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
39418 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
39422 For example, try searching with the regexp
39423 \begin_inset Newline newline
39427 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393222
39439 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651393089
39440 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
39445 \begin_inset Newline newline
39448 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
39451 \begin_layout Standard
39452 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet)
39453 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393403
39459 \begin_layout Standard
39460 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39468 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
39469 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
39470 sub-expressions is absolute.
39472 \begin_inset space ~
39476 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
39479 always refers to the first occurrence of
39480 \begin_inset Formula $()$
39483 in all entered regexps.
39491 \begin_layout Section
39493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39495 name "sec:Spellchecking"
39500 \begin_inset Index idx
39503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39512 \begin_layout Standard
39514 has a built-in spell checker.
39517 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39524 key or the toolbar button
39527 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
39530 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
39531 beginning of the currently selected text.
39532 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
39533 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
39534 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
39535 scrolled so that it is visible.
39536 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
39537 n, if any could be found.
39538 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
39542 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
39543 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
39546 \begin_layout Standard
39547 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
39550 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39554 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
39555 a different one at the top of the dialog.
39557 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
39558 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
39561 \begin_inset space ~
39569 arg "dialog-show character"
39572 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
39574 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
39577 \begin_layout Standard
39578 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
39579 can be downloaded from here:
39580 \begin_inset Newline newline
39584 \begin_inset Flex URL
39587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39589 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
39591 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
39592 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
39593 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
39601 \begin_inset Newline newline
39605 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
39607 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
39608 You should download
39611 \begin_inset space ~
39614 files for each language
39615 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
39620 link at the end of the opened webpage)
39623 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the
39624 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
39628 \begin_inset space ~
39631 files into \SpecialChar LyX
39632 's installation subfolder
39640 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
39642 \begin_inset Newline newline
39645 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
39646 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
39647 but in most cases these are
39663 is the language code.
39666 \begin_layout Subsection
39670 \begin_layout Standard
39673 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39674 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39676 \begin_inset space ~
39679 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39682 you can set the following things:
39685 \begin_layout Description
39687 \begin_inset space ~
39690 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
39691 should use for spell checking.
39692 Depending on your platform,
39702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39703 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
39704 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
39719 \begin_inset space ~
39722 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
39725 \begin_layout Description
39727 \begin_inset space ~
39730 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
39731 will always use the given language
39732 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
39735 \begin_layout Description
39737 \begin_inset space ~
39740 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
39742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39746 \begin_inset space \space{}
39750 This should normally not be needed.
39753 \begin_layout Description
39755 \begin_inset space ~
39759 \begin_inset space ~
39762 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
39764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39774 \begin_layout Description
39776 \begin_inset space ~
39779 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
39780 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
39781 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
39782 appear in a context menu.
39783 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
39787 \begin_layout Description
39789 \begin_inset space ~
39793 \begin_inset space ~
39797 \begin_inset space ~
39800 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
39804 \begin_layout Section
39806 \begin_inset Index idx
39809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39816 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39818 name "sec:Thesaurus"
39825 \begin_layout Standard
39827 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
39828 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
39837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39838 \begin_inset CommandInset href
39840 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
39850 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
39852 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
39853 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
39854 which are available for many languages.
39857 \begin_layout Standard
39858 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
39859 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
39863 \begin_layout Subsection
39864 Setting up the thesaurus
39867 \begin_layout Standard
39876 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
39880 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
39885 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
39887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39891 \begin_inset space ~
39899 For instance, the US English files are named:
39902 \begin_layout Itemize
39906 \begin_layout Itemize
39910 \begin_layout Standard
39919 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
39920 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
39923 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39924 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39925 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
39927 \begin_inset space ~
39932 ) to the path where they are installed.
39936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39937 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
39938 ies, typical locations are
39944 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
39948 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
39952 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
39955 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
39961 LibreOffice-<Version>
39968 On the Mac, the default location is
39970 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
39971 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
39972 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
39973 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
39974 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
39975 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
39983 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
39984 during the \SpecialChar LyX
39985 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
39989 \begin_layout Standard
39990 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
39992 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
39994 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
39997 thesaurus dictionaries, you can download them from here:
39998 \begin_inset Newline newline
40002 \begin_inset Flex URL
40005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40007 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
40009 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
40010 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
40011 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
40021 \begin_layout Standard
40022 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
40023 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
40025 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40026 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40027 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
40029 \begin_inset space ~
40034 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
40036 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
40037 and point \SpecialChar LyX
40041 \begin_layout Standard
40042 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
40044 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
40047 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
40053 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
40056 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
40057 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
40059 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40065 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40066 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40067 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
40069 \begin_inset space ~
40074 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
40077 \begin_layout Subsection
40078 Using the thesaurus
40081 \begin_layout Standard
40082 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
40084 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40087 or the toolbar button
40090 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40093 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
40095 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
40097 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
40098 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
40099 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
40108 ), related terms (such as
40111 \begin_inset space ~
40120 ), compounds (such as
40123 \begin_inset space ~
40132 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
40141 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
40144 \begin_layout Standard
40145 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
40146 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
40150 \begin_layout Standard
40151 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
40152 the dictionary, such as the above
40156 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
40157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40161 \begin_inset space \space{}
40164 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
40165 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
40166 For example, looking up the word form
40170 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
40175 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
40176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40180 \begin_inset space \space{}
40191 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
40192 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
40193 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
40196 \begin_layout Section
40198 \begin_inset Index idx
40201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40208 \begin_inset Index idx
40211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40212 Document ! Change Tracking
40218 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40220 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
40227 \begin_layout Standard
40228 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
40229 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
40230 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
40231 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
40233 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40235 \begin_inset space ~
40238 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40240 \begin_inset space ~
40248 \begin_layout Standard
40249 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
40263 The color depends on the author that made the change.
40264 You can change the color in
40266 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40267 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40269 \begin_inset space ~
40273 \begin_inset space ~
40278 \SpecialChar menuseparator
40284 \begin_inset Index idx
40287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40288 Color ! Change tracking
40293 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
40294 's status bar when the
40295 cursor is in changed text.
40296 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
40299 arg "changes-merge"
40305 \begin_layout Standard
40306 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
40308 \begin_inset Index idx
40311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40320 \begin_layout Standard
40321 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40327 \begin_layout Standard
40328 \begin_inset Graphics
40329 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
40337 \begin_layout Standard
40338 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40344 \begin_layout Standard
40345 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
40348 \begin_layout Standard
40349 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40355 \begin_layout Standard
40356 \begin_inset Tabular
40357 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
40358 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40359 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40360 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40361 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40370 arg "changes-track"
40378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40384 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40386 \begin_inset space ~
40389 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40391 \begin_inset space ~
40400 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40409 arg "changes-output"
40417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40423 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40425 \begin_inset space ~
40428 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40430 \begin_inset space ~
40434 \begin_inset space ~
40438 \begin_inset space ~
40447 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40468 Jumps to the next change
40474 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40483 arg "change-accept"
40491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40497 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40499 \begin_inset space ~
40502 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40504 \begin_inset space ~
40513 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40522 arg "change-reject"
40530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40536 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40538 \begin_inset space ~
40541 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40543 \begin_inset space ~
40552 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40561 arg "changes-merge"
40569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40575 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40577 \begin_inset space ~
40580 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40582 \begin_inset space ~
40591 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40600 arg "all-changes-accept"
40608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40614 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40616 \begin_inset space ~
40619 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40621 \begin_inset space ~
40625 \begin_inset space ~
40634 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40643 arg "all-changes-reject"
40651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40657 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40659 \begin_inset space ~
40662 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40664 \begin_inset space ~
40668 \begin_inset space ~
40677 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40700 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40701 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
40703 \begin_inset space ~
40712 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40735 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
40737 \begin_inset space ~
40753 \begin_layout Standard
40754 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40760 \begin_layout Standard
40761 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
40781 \begin_layout Standard
40782 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
40783 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
40784 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
40785 the next change after the current cursor position.
40786 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
40787 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
40788 step to the next change.
40789 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
40792 \begin_layout Standard
40793 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
40794 to describe a change.
40797 \begin_layout Standard
40799 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
40800 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40806 \begin_inset Index idx
40809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40817 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
40819 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40826 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40832 \begin_layout Section
40833 Comparison of Documents
40834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40836 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40841 \begin_inset Index idx
40844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40845 Comparison of documents
40853 \begin_layout Standard
40854 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
40857 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40861 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
40862 file with change tracking enabled showing the
40864 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
40866 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
40870 \begin_inset space ~
40874 \begin_inset space ~
40878 \begin_inset space ~
40887 \begin_inset space ~
40891 \begin_inset space ~
40895 \begin_inset space ~
40899 \begin_inset space ~
40903 \begin_inset space ~
40907 \begin_inset space ~
40912 enables the change tracking option
40915 \begin_inset space ~
40919 \begin_inset space ~
40923 \begin_inset space ~
40928 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
40931 \begin_layout Section
40932 International Support
40933 \begin_inset Index idx
40936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40937 International support
40945 \begin_layout Standard
40946 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
40947 with any language you want.
40948 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
40949 up \SpecialChar LyX
40951 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40953 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
40961 \begin_layout Standard
40962 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
40963 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
40964 \begin_inset space ~
40968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40970 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
40977 \begin_layout Subsection
40979 \begin_inset Index idx
40982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40989 \begin_inset Index idx
40992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40993 Document ! Settings
40999 \begin_inset Index idx
41002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41003 Document ! Language
41011 \begin_layout Standard
41014 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41015 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41018 dialog lets you set
41020 the language, the quote style and character encoding
41025 \begin_layout Standard
41030 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41035 \begin_inset space ~
41040 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
41041 For details about the different encoding options see section
41042 \begin_inset space ~
41046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41048 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
41055 \begin_layout Subsection
41056 Keyboard mapping configuration
41057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41059 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
41066 \begin_layout Standard
41067 If you have for example a U.
41068 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41071 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
41072 can use an alternate keymap.
41073 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
41078 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41079 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41080 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
41083 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
41084 \begin_inset space ~
41088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41090 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
41095 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
41096 which one you want to use.
41099 \begin_layout Standard
41100 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
41101 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
41102 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
41103 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41106 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
41107 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
41108 one to support the characters you want.
41109 This and many other customizations are explained in the
41116 \begin_layout Chapter
41119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41121 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
41128 \begin_layout Standard
41129 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
41130 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
41131 topic inside the user's guide.
41134 \begin_layout Section
41136 \begin_inset Index idx
41139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41148 \begin_layout Standard
41153 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
41156 \begin_layout Subsection
41160 \begin_layout Standard
41161 Creates a new document.
41164 \begin_layout Subsection
41168 \begin_layout Standard
41169 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
41170 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
41171 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
41173 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
41174 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
41180 \begin_layout Subsection
41184 \begin_layout Standard
41188 \begin_layout Subsection
41192 \begin_layout Standard
41193 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
41194 Click there on a file to open it.
41197 \begin_layout Subsection
41199 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
41203 \begin_layout Standard
41205 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
41206 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
41210 \begin_layout Subsection
41214 \begin_layout Standard
41215 Closes the current document.
41218 \begin_layout Subsection
41222 \begin_layout Standard
41223 Closes all opened documents.
41226 \begin_layout Subsection
41230 \begin_layout Standard
41231 Saves the actual document.
41234 \begin_layout Subsection
41238 \begin_layout Standard
41239 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
41240 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
41244 \begin_layout Subsection
41246 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
41250 \begin_layout Standard
41252 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
41253 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
41259 \begin_layout Subsection
41263 \begin_layout Standard
41264 Saves all opened documents.
41267 \begin_layout Subsection
41271 \begin_layout Standard
41272 Reloads the actual document from disk.
41275 \begin_layout Subsection
41279 \begin_layout Standard
41280 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
41281 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
41282 It is described in the section
41284 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
41289 Additional Features
41294 \begin_layout Subsection
41298 \begin_layout Standard
41299 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
41300 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
41302 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
41303 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
41307 \begin_layout Standard
41308 When using the menu entry
41311 \begin_inset space ~
41316 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
41320 \begin_inset space ~
41324 \begin_inset space ~
41328 \begin_inset space ~
41333 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
41334 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
41337 \begin_layout Subsection
41339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41341 name "subsec:Export"
41348 \begin_layout Standard
41349 You can export your document to various file formats.
41350 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
41352 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
41353 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
41354 during its configuration.
41357 \begin_layout Standard
41358 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
41360 \begin_inset space ~
41364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41366 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
41373 \begin_layout Description
41379 \begin_inset space ~
41382 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
41384 \begin_inset space ~
41387 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
41388 \begin_inset Newline newline
41391 Since \SpecialChar LyX
41392 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
41396 \begin_layout Description
41397 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
41403 \begin_layout Description
41405 \begin_inset space ~
41408 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
41414 \begin_layout Description
41415 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
41416 's native DVI-format.
41417 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
41418 files paths or file names in your document.
41420 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
41427 \begin_layout Description
41428 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
41429 in files paths or file names
41432 \begin_layout Description
41434 \begin_inset space ~
41441 ) DVI-format using the program
41443 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41446 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
41450 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41458 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
41466 \begin_layout Description
41468 \begin_inset space ~
41471 (cropped) the same as
41475 but with cropped page margins.
41478 \begin_layout Description
41480 \begin_inset space ~
41483 Dot text file with code in the programming language
41487 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
41492 \begin_layout Description
41496 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41504 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
41512 \begin_layout Description
41514 \begin_inset space ~
41518 \begin_inset space ~
41521 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
41525 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
41533 \begin_layout Description
41537 \begin_inset space ~
41546 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41547 source that is compilable with the program
41549 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41553 \begin_layout Description
41557 \begin_inset space ~
41562 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41563 source, additionally all images used in the document
41564 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
41568 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
41571 \begin_layout Description
41575 \begin_inset space ~
41580 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41581 source code, additionally all images used in the document
41582 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
41590 \begin_layout Description
41594 \begin_inset space ~
41603 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41604 source that is compilable with the program
41610 \begin_layout Description
41612 \begin_inset space ~
41616 \begin_inset space ~
41623 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41624 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
41630 \begin_layout Description
41632 \begin_inset space ~
41635 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
41636 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
41638 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41642 \begin_inset space \space{}
41647 \begin_inset space ~
41651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41666 represent the version number)
41669 \begin_layout Description
41671 \begin_inset space ~
41675 \begin_inset space ~
41678 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
41679 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
41680 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41684 \begin_layout Description
41685 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
41686 's internal XHTML engine
41689 \begin_layout Description
41691 \begin_inset space ~
41695 \begin_inset space ~
41699 \begin_inset space ~
41703 \begin_inset space ~
41706 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
41711 For the conversion the program
41720 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
41723 \begin_layout Description
41724 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
41729 \begin_layout Description
41731 \begin_inset space ~
41734 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
41736 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
41739 For the conversion the program
41748 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
41751 \begin_layout Description
41753 \begin_inset space ~
41756 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
41757 For the conversion the program
41766 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
41769 \begin_layout Description
41771 \begin_inset space ~
41774 (cropped) the same as
41777 \begin_inset space ~
41782 but with cropped page margins
41785 \begin_layout Description
41789 \begin_inset space ~
41794 PDF-format using the program
41798 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
41801 \begin_layout Description
41805 \begin_inset space ~
41809 \begin_inset space ~
41817 \begin_inset space ~
41822 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
41823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41827 \begin_inset space \space{}
41830 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
41834 \begin_layout Description
41838 \begin_inset space ~
41843 PDF-format using the program
41845 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41848 , produces PDF-files directly
41851 \begin_layout Description
41855 \begin_inset space ~
41860 PDF-format using the program
41864 , produces PDF-files directly
41867 \begin_layout Description
41871 \begin_inset space ~
41876 PDF-format using the program
41880 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
41883 \begin_layout Description
41887 \begin_inset space ~
41892 PDF-format using the program
41897 , produces PDF-files directly
41900 \begin_layout Description
41904 \begin_inset space ~
41912 \begin_layout Description
41916 \begin_inset space ~
41920 \begin_inset space ~
41925 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
41926 and then exported as text using the program
41931 \begin_layout Description
41936 PostScript format using the program
41944 options see section
41945 \begin_inset space ~
41949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41951 reference "subsec:General-output"
41958 \begin_layout Description
41959 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41960 source and also code in the statistical programming
41974 it is possible to use
41978 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
41982 \begin_layout Standard
41983 If one of the menu entries
41990 \begin_inset space ~
41999 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42001 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42003 \begin_inset space ~
42007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42009 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42014 \begin_inset Index idx
42017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42018 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42027 \begin_layout Subsection
42031 \begin_layout Standard
42032 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
42033 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
42036 \begin_inset space ~
42040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42042 reference "sec:Paths"
42047 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
42056 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
42057 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
42058 's preferences as described in section
42059 \begin_inset space ~
42063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42065 reference "subsec:Converters"
42072 \begin_layout Subsection
42073 New and Close Window
42076 \begin_layout Standard
42077 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
42081 \begin_layout Subsection
42085 \begin_layout Standard
42086 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
42089 \begin_layout Section
42091 \begin_inset Index idx
42094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42103 \begin_layout Subsection
42107 \begin_layout Standard
42108 Described in section
42109 \begin_inset space ~
42113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42115 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
42122 \begin_layout Subsection
42123 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
42126 \begin_layout Standard
42127 Described in section
42128 \begin_inset space ~
42132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42134 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
42141 \begin_layout Subsection
42145 \begin_layout Standard
42146 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
42147 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
42150 \begin_layout Subsection
42154 \begin_layout Standard
42155 Selects the whole document.
42158 \begin_layout Subsection
42159 Find & Replace (Quick)
42162 \begin_layout Standard
42163 Described in section
42164 \begin_inset space ~
42168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42170 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
42177 \begin_layout Subsection
42178 Find & Replace (Advanced)
42181 \begin_layout Standard
42182 Described in section
42183 \begin_inset space ~
42187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42189 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
42196 \begin_layout Subsection
42197 Move Paragraph Up/Down
42200 \begin_layout Standard
42201 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
42205 \begin_layout Subsection
42207 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
42211 \begin_layout Standard
42213 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
42214 Described in section
42215 \begin_inset space ~
42219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42221 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
42230 \begin_layout Subsection
42232 \begin_inset Index idx
42235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42236 Paragraph ! Settings
42244 \begin_layout Standard
42245 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
42246 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
42250 \begin_layout Standard
42251 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
42252 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
42258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42259 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42261 \begin_inset space ~
42267 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
42271 \begin_layout Subsection
42273 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
42277 \begin_layout Standard
42279 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
42280 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
42285 \begin_layout Enumerate
42287 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
42288 Customize text properties by means of the
42294 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
42297 ; this is described in section
42298 \begin_inset space ~
42302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42304 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
42311 \begin_layout Enumerate
42313 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
42314 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
42316 Apply last settings
42319 \begin_layout Enumerate
42321 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
42322 Change the casing of selected text (
42337 \begin_layout Subsection
42339 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
42343 \begin_layout Standard
42345 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
42346 This sub-menu only appears
42347 \change_inserted 630872221 1621860799
42349 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
42350 the document class or a module provides custom text styles (in the case
42373 \begin_inset space ~
42377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42379 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
42388 \begin_layout Subsection
42389 Table and Rows & Columns
42392 \begin_layout Standard
42393 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
42394 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
42395 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
42398 \begin_layout Subsection
42402 \begin_layout Standard
42403 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
42404 It will dissolve this inset.
42405 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
42409 \begin_layout Subsection
42413 \begin_layout Standard
42414 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
42415 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
42418 \begin_layout Subsection
42419 Increase/Decrease List Depth
42422 \begin_layout Standard
42423 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
42425 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
42426 \begin_inset space ~
42430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42432 reference "sec:Nesting"
42437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42439 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42446 \begin_layout Section
42448 \begin_inset Index idx
42451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42460 \begin_layout Standard
42461 At the bottom of the
42465 menu the opened documents are listed.
42468 \begin_layout Subsection
42469 Open/Close all Insets
42472 \begin_layout Standard
42473 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
42476 \begin_layout Subsection
42477 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
42480 \begin_layout Standard
42481 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
42484 \begin_layout Standard
42485 Math macros are described in the
42492 \begin_layout Subsection
42496 \begin_layout Standard
42497 Shows the outline window as described in sections
42498 \begin_inset space ~
42502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42504 reference "sec:Navigating"
42509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42511 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
42518 \begin_layout Subsection
42522 \begin_layout Standard
42523 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
42525 \begin_inset space ~
42529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42531 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42538 \begin_layout Subsection
42542 \begin_layout Standard
42543 Opens a window showing console messages.
42544 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
42546 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42549 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
42550 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
42551 is processing the document.
42554 \begin_layout Subsection
42556 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42558 name "subsec:Toolbars"
42563 \begin_inset Index idx
42566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42575 \begin_layout Standard
42576 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
42578 All toolbars and the
42581 \begin_inset space ~
42599 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
42601 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195495
42603 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195492
42607 \begin_layout Standard
42609 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195407
42613 \begin_inset space ~
42631 \begin_inset space ~
42643 \begin_inset space ~
42648 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
42651 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195728
42655 \change_inserted -712698321 1608196033
42657 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets
42671 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195563
42672 denoted in the menu with the suffix
42681 \begin_layout Standard
42686 state the toolbar is permanently shown
42687 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195803
42692 state it is never shown
42698 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
42699 or when a certain feature is enabled.
42700 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
42701 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
42702 is inside a formula or table respectively
42703 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195857
42704 , the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment
42709 \begin_layout Standard
42711 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
42712 \begin_inset space ~
42716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42718 reference "sec:Toolbars"
42725 \begin_layout Subsection
42729 \begin_layout Standard
42733 \begin_inset space ~
42737 \begin_inset space ~
42741 \begin_inset space ~
42745 \begin_inset space ~
42749 \begin_inset space ~
42753 \begin_inset space ~
42758 will split \SpecialChar LyX
42759 's main window vertically while
42762 \begin_inset space ~
42766 \begin_inset space ~
42770 \begin_inset space ~
42774 \begin_inset space ~
42778 \begin_inset space ~
42782 \begin_inset space ~
42787 will split it horizontally.
42788 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
42789 to view the same document, but at different positions.
42790 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
42791 three or more documents at the same time.
42792 To close a split view, use the menu
42795 \begin_inset space ~
42799 \begin_inset space ~
42807 \begin_layout Subsection
42811 \begin_layout Standard
42812 Closes a split view.
42815 \begin_layout Subsection
42819 \begin_layout Standard
42820 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
42821 so that you will see nothing but your text.
42822 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
42823 's main window fullscreen.
42824 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
42825 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
42828 \begin_layout Section
42830 \begin_inset Index idx
42833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42842 \begin_layout Subsection
42846 \begin_layout Standard
42847 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
42848 \begin_inset space ~
42852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42854 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
42865 \begin_layout Subsection
42867 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42869 name "subsec:Special-Character"
42876 \begin_layout Standard
42877 Here you can insert the following characters:
42880 \begin_layout Description
42885 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
42888 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
42889 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42890 -packages you have installed.
42891 You can get a complete display by checking
42894 \begin_inset space ~
42900 \begin_inset Newline newline
42904 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42912 Not all characters will be visible in the
42916 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
42917 dialog (see section
42918 \begin_inset space ~
42922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42924 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
42928 ) can display every character.
42936 \begin_layout Description
42937 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
42941 \begin_layout Description
42943 \begin_inset space ~
42947 \begin_inset space ~
42950 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
42951 \begin_inset space ~
42955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42957 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
42964 \begin_layout Description
42966 \begin_inset space ~
42969 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
42972 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42973 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42979 \begin_layout Description
42981 \begin_inset space ~
42984 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
42987 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42988 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42994 \begin_layout Description
42996 \change_deleted 177693 1654619391
42998 \change_inserted 177693 1654619396
43002 \begin_inset space ~
43005 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that
43006 \change_deleted 177693 1654619439
43008 \change_inserted 177693 1654619443
43011 line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
43015 \begin_layout Description
43017 \begin_inset space ~
43020 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
43024 \begin_layout Description
43026 \begin_inset space ~
43030 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
43031 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
43037 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
43042 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
43044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43048 \begin_inset space \space{}
43051 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
43052 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
43058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43061 To insert a fraction use the command
43066 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
43070 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
43076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43079 The visible space is hereby the character before the
43086 \begin_layout Description
43088 \begin_inset space ~
43091 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
43095 \begin_layout Description
43097 \begin_inset space ~
43101 \begin_inset Index idx
43104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43111 \begin_inset Index idx
43114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43115 Language ! Phonetic symbols
43120 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
43121 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
43123 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43129 \begin_inset Index idx
43132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43140 \begin_inset Newline newline
43143 More information about this feature can be found in the
43149 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43155 \begin_layout Description
43156 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
43158 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
43159 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
43163 \begin_layout Subsection
43167 \begin_layout Standard
43168 Opens a submenu with the following options:
43171 \begin_layout Description
43172 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
43173 \begin_inset script superscript
43175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43184 \begin_layout Description
43185 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
43186 \begin_inset script subscript
43188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43197 \begin_layout Description
43199 \change_deleted 177693 1654619456
43201 \change_inserted 177693 1654619456
43205 \begin_inset space ~
43209 \change_deleted 177693 1654619466
43211 \change_inserted 177693 1654619468
43214 space as described in section
43215 \begin_inset space ~
43219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43221 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
43228 \begin_layout Description
43230 \begin_inset space ~
43233 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
43234 \begin_inset space ~
43238 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
43240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43242 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
43247 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
43249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43251 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
43260 \begin_layout Description
43262 \begin_inset space ~
43265 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
43266 \begin_inset space ~
43270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43272 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
43279 \begin_layout Description
43281 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
43283 \begin_inset space ~
43286 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
43288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43292 \begin_inset space \space{}
43295 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
43296 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
43302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43305 To insert a fraction use the command
43310 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
43314 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
43320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43323 The visible space is hereby the character before the
43332 \begin_layout Description
43334 \begin_inset space ~
43337 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
43338 \begin_inset space ~
43342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43344 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
43351 \begin_layout Description
43353 \begin_inset space ~
43356 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
43357 \begin_inset space ~
43361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43363 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
43370 \begin_layout Description
43372 \begin_inset space ~
43375 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
43376 \begin_inset space ~
43380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43382 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
43389 \begin_layout Description
43390 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
43391 \begin_inset space ~
43395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43397 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
43404 \begin_layout Description
43406 \begin_inset space ~
43409 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
43410 \begin_inset space ~
43414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43416 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
43423 \begin_layout Description
43425 \begin_inset space ~
43428 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
43429 \begin_inset space ~
43433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43435 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
43442 \begin_layout Description
43444 \begin_inset space ~
43448 \begin_inset space ~
43451 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
43454 \begin_inset space ~
43458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43460 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
43467 for a usage example.
43470 \begin_layout Description
43472 \begin_inset space ~
43476 \begin_inset space ~
43479 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
43480 \begin_inset space ~
43484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43486 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
43493 \begin_layout Description
43495 \begin_inset space ~
43498 Break Inserts a forced line break that
43499 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
43502 justifies the remaining text as described in section
43503 \begin_inset space ~
43507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43509 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
43516 \begin_layout Description
43518 \begin_inset space ~
43521 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
43522 \begin_inset space ~
43526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43528 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
43535 \begin_layout Description
43537 \begin_inset space ~
43540 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
43541 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
43543 \begin_inset space ~
43547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43549 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
43554 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005731
43558 \begin_layout Description
43560 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
43562 \begin_inset space ~
43566 \begin_inset space ~
43569 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
43570 to prevent a page break at the given position.
43572 \begin_inset space ~
43576 \change_inserted 630872221 1621862329
43578 \begin_inset space ~
43582 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
43584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43586 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
43595 \begin_layout Description
43597 \begin_inset space ~
43600 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
43601 \begin_inset space ~
43605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43607 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
43614 \begin_layout Description
43616 \begin_inset space ~
43620 \begin_inset space ~
43623 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
43624 \begin_inset space ~
43628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43630 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
43637 \begin_layout Subsection
43639 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43643 \begin_layout Standard
43645 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43646 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
43647 The submenu allows you to insert
43650 \begin_layout Description
43652 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43654 \begin_inset space ~
43657 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
43660 \begin_layout Description
43662 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43664 \begin_inset space ~
43668 \begin_inset space ~
43671 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
43675 \begin_layout Description
43677 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43679 \begin_inset space ~
43682 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
43685 \begin_layout Description
43687 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43689 \begin_inset space ~
43692 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
43695 \begin_layout Description
43697 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43699 \begin_inset space ~
43703 \begin_inset space ~
43706 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
43710 \begin_layout Description
43712 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43714 \begin_inset space ~
43717 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
43720 \begin_layout Description
43722 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867346
43724 \begin_inset space ~
43728 \begin_inset space ~
43732 \begin_inset space ~
43735 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
43738 \begin_layout Description
43740 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867469
43742 \begin_inset space ~
43746 \begin_inset space ~
43749 Revision inserts the version control reference number (e.g.
43751 This submenu does not appear if the file is not under version control
43754 \begin_layout Description
43756 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43758 \begin_inset space ~
43761 Name inserts the user name as specified in
43763 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43764 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43770 \begin_layout Description
43772 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43774 \begin_inset space ~
43777 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
43779 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43780 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43786 \begin_layout Description
43788 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43789 Other\SpecialChar ldots
43790 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
43791 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
43794 \begin_layout Subsection
43797 List/Contents/References
43800 \begin_layout Standard
43801 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
43805 \begin_inset space ~
43826 are described in section
43827 \begin_inset space ~
43831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43833 reference "sec:toc"
43842 is described in section
43843 \begin_inset space ~
43847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43849 reference "sec:Index"
43857 is described in section
43858 \begin_inset space ~
43862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43864 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
43870 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43873 is described in section
43874 \begin_inset space ~
43878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43880 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
43887 \begin_layout Subsection
43891 \begin_layout Standard
43892 To insert floats, as described in section
43893 \begin_inset space ~
43897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43899 reference "sec:Floats"
43903 and in detail the chapter
43910 \begin_inset space ~
43918 \begin_layout Subsection
43922 \begin_layout Standard
43923 To insert notes, described in section
43924 \begin_inset space ~
43928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43930 reference "sec:Notes"
43937 \begin_layout Subsection
43941 \begin_layout Standard
43942 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
43944 Branches are described in section
43945 \begin_inset space ~
43949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43951 reference "sec:Branches"
43958 \begin_layout Subsection
43962 \begin_layout Standard
43963 Inserts document class-specific insets.
43964 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
43966 An example is the document class
43967 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
43969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43977 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
43981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43986 with three custom insets.
43989 Flex insets and InsetLayout
43993 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
43999 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
44002 \begin_layout Subsection
44004 \begin_inset Index idx
44007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44016 \begin_layout Standard
44017 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
44019 For more information see chapter
44021 External Document Parts
44024 \begin_inset space ~
44030 \begin_layout Subsection
44032 \begin_inset Index idx
44035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44044 \begin_layout Standard
44045 Inserts a box in a certain style.
44046 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
44053 \begin_inset space ~
44061 \begin_layout Subsection
44065 \begin_layout Standard
44070 dialog as described in section
44071 \begin_inset space ~
44075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44077 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44084 \begin_layout Subsection
44088 \begin_layout Standard
44093 as described in section
44094 \begin_inset space ~
44098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44100 reference "sec:Cross-References"
44107 \begin_layout Subsection
44111 \begin_layout Standard
44116 as described in section
44117 \begin_inset space ~
44121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44123 reference "sec:Cross-References"
44130 \begin_layout Subsection
44132 \begin_inset Index idx
44135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44142 \begin_inset Index idx
44145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44146 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
44154 \begin_layout Standard
44155 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
44156 Floats are described in section
44157 \begin_inset space ~
44161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44163 reference "sec:Floats"
44167 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
44170 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
44178 \begin_inset space ~
44186 \begin_layout Subsection
44190 \begin_layout Standard
44191 Inserts an index entry as described in section
44192 \begin_inset space ~
44196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44198 reference "sec:Index"
44205 \begin_layout Subsection
44209 \begin_layout Standard
44210 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
44211 \begin_inset space ~
44215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44217 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
44224 \begin_layout Subsection
44228 \begin_layout Standard
44229 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
44230 Tables are described in section
44231 \begin_inset space ~
44235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44237 reference "sec:Tables"
44241 and in detail in the chapter
44248 \begin_inset space ~
44256 \begin_layout Subsection
44260 \begin_layout Standard
44266 Graphics are described in section
44267 \begin_inset space ~
44271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44273 reference "sec:Graphics"
44280 \begin_layout Subsection
44284 \begin_layout Standard
44285 Inserts a URL as described in section
44286 \begin_inset space ~
44290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44292 reference "subsec:URLs"
44299 \begin_layout Subsection
44303 \begin_layout Standard
44304 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
44305 \begin_inset space ~
44309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44311 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
44318 \begin_layout Subsection
44322 \begin_layout Standard
44323 Inserts a footnote as described in section
44324 \begin_inset space ~
44328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44330 reference "sec:Footnotes"
44337 \begin_layout Subsection
44341 \begin_layout Standard
44342 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
44343 \begin_inset space ~
44347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44349 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
44356 \begin_layout Subsection
44359 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
44362 \begin_layout Standard
44363 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
44364 environments of the same type.
44366 \begin_inset space ~
44370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44372 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
44376 for an explanation.
44379 \begin_layout Subsection
44383 \begin_layout Standard
44384 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
44385 title or caption of a float.
44386 Inserts a short title as described in section
44387 \begin_inset space ~
44391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44393 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
44400 \begin_layout Subsection
44405 \begin_layout Standard
44406 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
44407 Code box as described in section
44408 \begin_inset space ~
44412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44414 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
44421 \begin_layout Subsection
44423 \begin_inset Index idx
44426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44435 \begin_layout Standard
44436 Inserts a program listings box.
44437 Program listings are explained in the chapter
44439 Program Code Listings
44444 \begin_inset space ~
44452 \begin_layout Subsection
44454 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
44458 \begin_layout Standard
44460 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
44461 Inserts the actual date.
44462 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
44469 \begin_layout Subsection
44473 \begin_layout Standard
44474 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
44475 \begin_inset space ~
44479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44481 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
44488 \begin_layout Section
44490 \begin_inset Index idx
44493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44502 \begin_layout Standard
44503 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
44504 \begin_inset space ~
44507 of the current document.
44508 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
44511 \begin_layout Subsection
44515 \begin_layout Standard
44516 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
44517 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
44518 to jump, for example, between section
44519 \begin_inset space ~
44523 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
44524 \begin_inset space ~
44527 2.5 and use the submenu
44530 \begin_inset space ~
44534 \begin_inset space ~
44541 \begin_inset space ~
44547 \begin_inset space ~
44551 \begin_inset space ~
44557 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
44561 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
44567 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
44570 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
44573 \begin_layout Standard
44575 \change_deleted 244031559 1613377262
44576 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
44582 \begin_inset space ~
44587 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
44590 \begin_inset space ~
44595 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
44598 \begin_layout Subsection
44599 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
44602 \begin_layout Standard
44603 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
44607 \begin_layout Subsection
44611 \begin_layout Standard
44612 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
44613 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
44614 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
44618 \begin_inset space ~
44622 \begin_inset space ~
44630 \begin_layout Subsection
44634 \begin_layout Standard
44635 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
44638 The \SpecialChar LyX
44639 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
44641 \begin_inset space ~
44649 \begin_inset space ~
44654 manual for a detailed description.
44657 \begin_layout Section
44659 \begin_inset Index idx
44662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44671 \begin_layout Subsection
44675 \begin_layout Standard
44676 Change Tracking is described in section
44677 \begin_inset space ~
44681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44683 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44690 \begin_layout Subsection
44698 \begin_layout Standard
44699 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
44700 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
44701 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44703 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
44704 to the clipboard or update the view.
44705 \begin_inset Newline newline
44708 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44712 \begin_layout Standard
44715 Open Containing Directory
44717 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
44718 's temporary folder for the document.
44719 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
44720 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
44721 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
44722 For example some journals require to send the
44726 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44730 \begin_layout Subsection
44731 Start Appendix Here
44734 \begin_layout Standard
44735 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
44736 as described in section
44737 \begin_inset space ~
44741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44743 reference "sec:Appendices"
44750 \begin_layout Subsection
44752 \begin_inset space ~
44758 \begin_layout Standard
44759 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
44760 default output format for the document (menu
44762 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44763 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44764 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44766 \begin_inset space ~
44770 \begin_inset space ~
44776 \begin_inset space ~
44780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44782 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
44786 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
44789 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44790 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44792 \begin_inset space ~
44795 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44797 \begin_inset space ~
44800 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44802 \begin_inset space ~
44806 \begin_inset space ~
44812 \begin_inset space ~
44816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44818 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44822 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
44823 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
44825 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44826 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44828 \begin_inset space ~
44831 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44833 \begin_inset space ~
44836 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44840 \begin_inset space ~
44844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44846 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44851 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
44852 when it is first configured.
44853 The default output format is
44856 \begin_inset space ~
44864 \begin_layout Subsection
44865 View (Other Formats)
44868 \begin_layout Standard
44869 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
44870 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
44871 actual document with an external program.
44872 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
44873 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44874 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
44876 All possible formats are listed in section
44877 \begin_inset space ~
44881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44883 reference "subsec:Export"
44888 You should at least see the menu entry
44893 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44895 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
44897 \begin_inset space ~
44901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44903 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
44908 \begin_inset Index idx
44911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44912 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
44921 \begin_layout Standard
44922 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
44923 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
44925 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44926 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44928 \begin_inset space ~
44931 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44933 \begin_inset space ~
44936 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44940 \begin_inset space ~
44944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44946 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44951 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
44952 when it is first configured.
44955 \begin_layout Subsection
44957 \begin_inset space ~
44963 \begin_layout Standard
44964 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
44965 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
44968 \begin_layout Subsection
44969 Update (Other Formats)
44972 \begin_layout Standard
44973 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
44974 your document without opening a new viewer window.
44977 \begin_layout Subsection
44978 View Master Document
44981 \begin_layout Standard
44982 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
44984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44998 \begin_inset space ~
45003 manual for more information on this topic).
45004 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
45005 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
45009 \begin_inset space ~
45013 \begin_inset space ~
45018 generates the output of the whole book, while
45022 will just output the chapter alone.
45025 \begin_layout Standard
45026 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
45027 in the document settings (menu
45029 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45030 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45031 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
45033 \begin_inset space ~
45037 \begin_inset space ~
45043 \begin_inset space ~
45047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45049 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
45053 ) or in the preferences (menu
45055 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45056 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45058 \begin_inset space ~
45061 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45063 \begin_inset space ~
45066 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
45068 \begin_inset space ~
45072 \begin_inset space ~
45078 \begin_inset space ~
45082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45084 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45091 \begin_layout Subsection
45092 Update Master Document
45095 \begin_layout Standard
45096 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
45098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45112 \begin_inset space ~
45117 manual for more information on this topic).
45118 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
45119 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
45122 \begin_layout Standard
45123 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
45124 in the document settings (menu
45126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45127 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45128 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
45130 \begin_inset space ~
45134 \begin_inset space ~
45140 \begin_inset space ~
45144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45146 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
45150 ) or in the preferences (menu
45152 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45153 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45155 \begin_inset space ~
45158 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45160 \begin_inset space ~
45163 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
45165 \begin_inset space ~
45169 \begin_inset space ~
45175 \begin_inset space ~
45179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45181 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45188 \begin_layout Subsection
45190 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45192 name "subsec:Compressed"
45199 \begin_layout Standard
45200 Un/compresses the current document.
45201 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
45202 compression (see the
45204 Additional Features
45206 manual for details).
45209 \begin_layout Subsection
45213 \begin_layout Standard
45214 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
45217 \begin_layout Subsection
45221 \begin_layout Standard
45222 The document settings are described in appendix
45223 \begin_inset space ~
45227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45229 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
45236 \begin_layout Section
45238 \begin_inset Index idx
45241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45250 \begin_layout Subsection
45254 \begin_layout Standard
45255 Spell checking is explained in section
45256 \begin_inset space ~
45260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45262 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45269 \begin_layout Subsection
45273 \begin_layout Standard
45274 The thesaurus is described in section
45275 \begin_inset space ~
45279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45281 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
45288 \begin_layout Subsection
45290 \begin_inset Index idx
45293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45300 \begin_inset Index idx
45303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45312 \begin_layout Standard
45313 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
45314 the highlighted document part.
45317 \begin_layout Subsection
45323 \begin_inset Index idx
45326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45327 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
45336 \begin_layout Standard
45337 Generates with the help of the program
45339 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
45342 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
45343 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
45344 This feature is not available on Windows.
45347 \begin_layout Subsection
45353 \begin_inset Index idx
45356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45366 \begin_layout Standard
45367 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45372 \begin_inset space ~
45377 to see the full filename paths.
45380 \begin_layout Subsection
45382 \begin_inset Index idx
45385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45394 \begin_layout Standard
45395 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
45396 files as described in section
45397 \begin_inset space ~
45401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45403 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
45410 \begin_layout Subsection
45412 \begin_inset Index idx
45415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45428 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
45433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45446 \begin_inset Index idx
45449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45450 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
45459 \begin_layout Standard
45460 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
45461 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
45462 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45463 -packages and programs it needs; see
45465 \begin_inset space ~
45469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45471 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
45478 \begin_layout Subsection
45482 \begin_layout Standard
45487 dialog as described in detail in appendix
45488 \begin_inset space ~
45492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45494 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45501 \begin_layout Section
45503 \begin_inset Index idx
45506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45515 \begin_layout Standard
45516 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
45517 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
45519 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
45523 \begin_layout Standard
45527 \begin_inset space ~
45532 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
45533 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45534 packages and classes found
45535 by \SpecialChar LyX
45537 \begin_inset space ~
45541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45543 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
45550 \begin_layout Standard
45554 \begin_inset space ~
45559 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
45564 \begin_layout Section
45566 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45568 name "sec:Toolbars"
45575 \begin_layout Standard
45576 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
45577 \begin_inset space ~
45581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45583 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
45590 \begin_layout Standard
45591 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
45592 This is described in the
45594 Additional Features
45599 \begin_layout Subsection
45601 \begin_inset Index idx
45604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45613 \begin_layout Standard
45614 \begin_inset Graphics
45615 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
45623 \begin_layout Standard
45624 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45630 \begin_layout Standard
45631 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45648 \begin_inset Note Note
45651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45652 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
45657 manual for more information.
45665 \begin_layout Standard
45666 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45672 \begin_layout Standard
45673 \begin_inset Tabular
45674 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
45675 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45676 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45677 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45683 \begin_inset Graphics
45684 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
45694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45698 pull-down box for the environments
45711 \begin_layout Standard
45712 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
45718 \begin_layout Standard
45720 \begin_inset Tabular
45721 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
45722 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45723 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45724 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45725 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45748 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45755 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45778 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45785 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45808 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45815 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45824 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
45832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45838 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45845 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45854 arg "spelling-continuously"
45862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45866 Spellcheck continuously
45872 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45895 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45902 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45925 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45932 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45955 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45962 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45985 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45992 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46015 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46017 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
46022 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46031 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46040 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
46048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46054 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46060 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46073 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46080 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
46088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46094 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46096 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46104 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46113 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46122 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
46130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46136 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46137 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
46144 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46165 Emphasize text, function of the
46166 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
46169 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46171 \begin_inset space ~
46174 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
46176 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
46182 arg "dialog-show character"
46193 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46214 Set text to noun style, function of the
46215 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
46218 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46220 \begin_inset space ~
46223 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
46225 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
46231 arg "dialog-show character"
46242 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46248 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
46251 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
46259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46264 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
46267 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46274 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46280 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
46285 arg "textstyle-apply"
46295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46300 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
46301 Format text using the current settings in the
46303 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46305 \begin_inset space ~
46308 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
46319 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46342 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46343 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
46345 \begin_inset space ~
46354 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46363 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
46371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46377 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46384 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46391 arg "tabular-insert"
46399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46405 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46412 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46418 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
46421 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
46429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46434 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
46437 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46444 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46453 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
46461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46465 Toggle outline window on/off,
46467 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46474 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46483 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
46491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46495 Toggle math toolbar on/off
46501 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46510 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
46518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46522 Toggle table toolbar on/off
46535 \begin_layout Subsection
46537 \begin_inset Index idx
46540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46549 \begin_layout Standard
46550 \begin_inset Graphics
46551 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
46559 \begin_layout Standard
46560 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46566 \begin_layout Standard
46567 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
46571 \begin_layout Standard
46572 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46578 \begin_layout Standard
46579 \begin_inset Tabular
46580 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
46581 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
46582 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46583 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46584 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46611 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46620 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
46628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46638 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46647 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
46655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46665 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46674 arg "layout-toggle List"
46682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46692 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46701 arg "layout-toggle Description"
46709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46719 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46728 arg "depth-increment"
46736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46742 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46744 \begin_inset space ~
46748 \begin_inset space ~
46757 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46766 arg "depth-decrement"
46774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46780 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46782 \begin_inset space ~
46786 \begin_inset space ~
46795 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46804 arg "float-insert figure"
46812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46818 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46819 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
46826 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46835 arg "float-insert table"
46843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46849 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46850 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
46857 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46880 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46887 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46896 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
46904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46910 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46917 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46926 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
46934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46940 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46947 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46970 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46972 \begin_inset space ~
46981 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46990 arg "nomencl-insert"
46998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47004 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
47006 \begin_inset space ~
47015 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47024 arg "footnote-insert"
47032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47038 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
47045 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47054 arg "marginalnote-insert"
47062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47068 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
47070 \begin_inset space ~
47079 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47102 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
47103 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
47105 \begin_inset space ~
47114 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47123 arg "box-insert Frameless"
47131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47137 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
47144 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47167 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
47174 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47197 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
47199 \begin_inset space ~
47208 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47217 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
47225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47231 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
47232 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
47239 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47248 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
47256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47262 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
47263 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47265 \begin_inset space ~
47274 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47283 arg "dialog-show character"
47291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47297 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47299 \begin_inset space ~
47302 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
47309 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47315 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
47320 arg "textstyle-apply"
47328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47333 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
47334 Format text using the recent settings in the
47337 arg "dialog-show character"
47346 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47355 arg "layout-paragraph"
47363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47369 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47371 \begin_inset space ~
47380 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47389 arg "thesaurus-entry"
47397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47403 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47417 \begin_layout Subsection
47418 View/Update Toolbar
47419 \begin_inset Index idx
47422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47423 Toolbar ! View / Update
47431 \begin_layout Standard
47432 \begin_inset Graphics
47433 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
47440 \begin_layout Standard
47441 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
47447 \begin_layout Standard
47448 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
47452 \begin_layout Standard
47453 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
47459 \begin_layout Standard
47460 \begin_inset Tabular
47461 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
47462 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
47463 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
47464 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
47465 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47488 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47495 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47504 arg "buffer-update"
47512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47518 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47525 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47534 arg "master-buffer-view"
47542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47548 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47550 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
47552 \begin_inset space ~
47558 \begin_inset space ~
47567 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47576 arg "master-buffer-update"
47584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47590 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47592 \begin_inset space ~
47596 \begin_inset space ~
47605 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47614 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
47622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47628 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47629 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47631 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
47633 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
47636 \SpecialChar menuseparator
47637 Synchronize with Output
47643 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47654 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
47664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47670 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47671 View (Other Formats)
47677 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47684 arg "update-others"
47688 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
47696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47702 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47703 Update (Other Formats)
47716 \begin_layout Standard
47718 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
47719 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
47725 \begin_layout Subsection
47729 \begin_layout Standard
47730 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
47731 \begin_inset space ~
47735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47737 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47741 , the table toolbar
47742 \begin_inset Index idx
47745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47754 \begin_inset space ~
47759 manual and the math macro toolbar
47760 \begin_inset Index idx
47763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47776 \begin_layout Chapter
47777 The Document Settings
47778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47780 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
47785 \begin_inset Index idx
47788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47789 Document ! Settings
47797 \begin_layout Standard
47801 \begin_inset space ~
47806 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
47807 is called with the menu
47809 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47813 You can save your document settings as default with the
47815 Save as Document Defaults
47817 button in any dialog.
47818 This will create a template named
47822 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
47823 when you create a new document without
47827 \begin_layout Standard
47832 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
47833 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
47836 \begin_layout Standard
47837 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
47838 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
47839 to find the one you are looking for.
47840 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
47841 the submenus of the dialog.
47843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47847 \begin_inset space \space{}
47851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47858 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
47859 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
47860 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
47863 \begin_layout Section
47867 \begin_layout Standard
47868 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
47870 Document classes are described in section
47871 \begin_inset space ~
47875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47877 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
47884 \begin_layout Standard
47888 \begin_inset space ~
47893 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
47898 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
47899 as a layout for a document class.
47900 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
47902 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
47911 \begin_layout Standard
47912 Some classes use special class options by default.
47913 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
47917 and you can decide to use them or not.
47918 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
47919 recommended you leave them untouched.
47924 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47925 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
47930 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47932 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
47937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47938 When you want to use one of the following drivers
47939 \begin_inset Newline newline
47944 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
47947 \begin_inset Newline newline
47950 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47951 distribution, see section
47956 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47958 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
47971 \begin_layout Standard
47976 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
47977 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
47978 in the background if the child document
47979 is opened without its master.
47980 This way child documents are always compilable.
47981 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
47988 \begin_inset space ~
47996 \begin_layout Standard
47997 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48008 \begin_inset Index idx
48011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48013 packages ! prettyref
48019 \begin_inset Index idx
48022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48024 packages ! refstyle
48029 for cross-references, see section
48030 \begin_inset space ~
48034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48036 reference "sec:Cross-References"
48043 \begin_layout Section
48047 \begin_layout Standard
48048 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
48049 Please refer to the section
48052 \begin_inset space ~
48060 \begin_inset space ~
48065 manual for details.
48068 \begin_layout Section
48072 \begin_layout Standard
48073 Modules are explained in section
48074 \begin_inset space ~
48078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48080 reference "subsec:Modules"
48087 \begin_layout Section
48091 \begin_layout Standard
48093 \begin_inset space ~
48097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48099 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
48106 \begin_layout Section
48110 \begin_layout Standard
48111 The document font settings are described in section
48112 \begin_inset space ~
48116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48118 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
48125 \begin_layout Section
48129 \begin_layout Standard
48130 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
48142 \begin_inset space ~
48147 and whether it should be a
48150 \begin_inset space ~
48155 can also be specified here.
48158 \begin_layout Standard
48159 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
48160 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
48161 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
48163 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
48166 \begin_layout Standard
48169 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
48172 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
48173 justifies the text on screen.
48174 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
48176 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
48180 \begin_layout Standard
48182 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
48191 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
48196 \begin_layout Section
48200 \begin_layout Standard
48201 This dialog is described in sections
48202 \begin_inset space ~
48206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48208 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
48213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48215 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
48222 \begin_layout Section
48226 \begin_layout Standard
48227 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
48228 \begin_inset space ~
48232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48234 reference "subsec:Margins"
48241 \begin_layout Section
48243 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48245 name "sec:Language-encodings"
48250 \begin_inset Index idx
48253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48254 Language ! Encoding
48262 \begin_layout Standard
48263 The document language and quote styles are set here.
48264 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
48265 (the \SpecialChar LyX
48267 is always encoded in utf8).
48268 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
48269 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
48270 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
48271 -command is not known for
48272 a particular character).
48273 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
48277 \begin_layout Standard
48279 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
48280 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
48281 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
48282 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
48283 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
48284 's default encoding).
48285 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
48286 's Unicode support covers the
48287 characters of most scripts.
48288 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
48289 using one of the traditional, or
48290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48297 , encodings is necessary.
48300 \begin_layout Standard
48302 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
48304 provides support for these traditional encodings.
48307 Traditional (auto-selected)
48313 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
48314 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
48315 the given language(s).
48317 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
48321 \begin_layout Standard
48323 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
48324 If you use the option
48329 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
48332 If the document contains text in more than one language you
48333 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
48336 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48339 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
48340 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
48341 exactly one encoding.
48342 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
48347 \begin_layout Standard
48349 \change_deleted 630872221 1621942852
48350 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
48356 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
48357 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
48359 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
48363 \begin_layout Standard
48365 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
48366 Finally, you can also select
48370 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
48371 Note that this encoding is then used for
48376 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
48377 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
48381 \begin_layout Standard
48383 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
48385 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943769
48389 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943773
48390 Do not load inputenc
48391 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
48395 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943234
48397 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943236
48399 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
48401 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943278
48402 in the next dropdown menu
48403 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
48404 does what it states:
48405 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943783
48407 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943782
48409 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
48410 t prevents \SpecialChar LyX
48411 from automatically loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48417 \begin_inset Index idx
48420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48422 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
48424 packages ! inputenc
48432 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
48433 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
48434 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
48435 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
48436 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
48438 Note that this option is only available for the standard
48444 Traditional (auto-selected)
48451 \begin_layout Standard
48453 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
48455 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
48456 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
48457 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
48458 installation supports Unicode), choose
48459 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
48460 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
48461 is quite incomplete, so
48462 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
48467 (when \SpecialChar LyX
48468 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
48469 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
48470 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
48471 -commands is not used, because all
48472 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
48473 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
48474 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48475 , two new alternative engines
48476 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
48478 Both engines support Unicode natively.
48480 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
48483 \begin_inset space ~
48491 \begin_inset space ~
48499 \begin_inset space ~
48505 \begin_inset space ~
48509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48511 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
48516 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
48520 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
48525 \begin_layout Standard
48529 \begin_inset space ~
48534 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48535 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
48537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48545 The possible settings are:
48548 \begin_layout Description
48549 Default uses the language package that is selected in
48551 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48552 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48556 \begin_inset space ~
48560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48562 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
48569 \begin_layout Description
48570 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
48571 format you will use.
48572 In many cases this will be
48577 \begin_inset Index idx
48580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48588 If the newer package
48593 \begin_inset Index idx
48596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48598 packages ! polyglossia
48603 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
48604 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48605 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
48607 this package will be used instead of
48614 \begin_layout Description
48616 \begin_inset space ~
48627 would be more appropriate.
48630 \begin_layout Description
48631 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
48632 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
48636 (for German texts), type in
48639 \begin_inset Newline newline
48644 usepackage{ngerman}
48647 \begin_layout Description
48648 None will not use a language package.
48649 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
48652 \begin_layout Standard
48653 Here is a list with the important encodings:
48656 \begin_layout Description
48658 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
48660 \begin_inset space ~
48664 \begin_inset space ~
48668 \begin_inset space ~
48675 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48681 \begin_inset Index idx
48684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48686 packages ! inputenc
48692 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
48693 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
48694 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
48700 \begin_layout Description
48701 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
48703 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
48704 commands, which may result in a big
48705 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
48706 -commands are needed.
48708 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943931
48709 This is the same as the
48722 \begin_layout Description
48724 \begin_inset space ~
48728 \begin_inset space ~
48731 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
48734 \begin_layout Description
48736 \begin_inset space ~
48740 \begin_inset space ~
48743 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
48746 \begin_layout Description
48748 \begin_inset space ~
48751 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
48754 \begin_layout Description
48756 \begin_inset space ~
48760 \begin_inset space ~
48763 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
48764 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
48767 \begin_layout Description
48769 \begin_inset space ~
48773 \begin_inset space ~
48776 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
48780 \begin_layout Description
48782 \begin_inset space ~
48786 \begin_inset space ~
48789 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
48790 ISO-8859-13 encoding
48793 \begin_layout Description
48795 \begin_inset space ~
48799 \begin_inset space ~
48803 \begin_inset space ~
48806 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
48807 \begin_inset space ~
48813 \begin_layout Description
48815 \begin_inset space ~
48819 \begin_inset space ~
48823 \begin_inset space ~
48826 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
48827 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
48830 \begin_layout Description
48832 \begin_inset space ~
48836 \begin_inset space ~
48839 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
48840 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
48841 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48842 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
48843 \begin_inset space ~
48847 \begin_inset space ~
48853 \begin_layout Description
48855 \begin_inset space ~
48859 \begin_inset space ~
48862 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
48863 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
48864 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48866 should try to use the encoding Unicode
48867 \begin_inset space ~
48871 \begin_inset space ~
48877 \begin_layout Description
48879 \begin_inset space ~
48883 \begin_inset space ~
48886 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
48889 \begin_layout Description
48891 \begin_inset space ~
48895 \begin_inset space ~
48898 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
48901 \begin_layout Description
48903 \begin_inset space ~
48907 \begin_inset space ~
48910 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
48913 \begin_layout Description
48915 \begin_inset space ~
48918 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
48921 \begin_layout Description
48923 \begin_inset space ~
48926 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
48929 \begin_layout Description
48931 \begin_inset space ~
48935 \begin_inset space ~
48938 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
48941 \begin_layout Description
48943 \begin_inset space ~
48947 \begin_inset space ~
48953 \begin_layout Description
48955 \begin_inset space ~
48959 \begin_inset space ~
48962 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
48965 \begin_layout Description
48967 \begin_inset space ~
48971 \begin_inset space ~
48977 \begin_layout Description
48979 \begin_inset space ~
48983 \begin_inset space ~
48986 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48992 \begin_inset Index idx
48995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49002 , when using this, set the document language to
49007 \begin_layout Description
49009 \begin_inset space ~
49013 \begin_inset space ~
49016 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49021 , when using this, set the document language to
49024 \begin_inset space ~
49030 \begin_layout Description
49032 \begin_inset space ~
49036 \begin_inset space ~
49039 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49045 \begin_inset Index idx
49048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49050 packages ! japanese
49055 , when using this, set the document language to
49060 \begin_layout Description
49062 \begin_inset space ~
49066 \begin_inset space ~
49069 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49074 , when using this, set the document language to
49079 \begin_layout Description
49081 \begin_inset space ~
49085 \begin_inset space ~
49088 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49093 , when using this, set the document language to
49098 \begin_layout Description
49100 \begin_inset space ~
49103 (EUC-KR) for Korean
49106 \begin_layout Description
49108 \begin_inset space ~
49112 \begin_inset space ~
49116 \begin_inset space ~
49119 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
49122 \begin_layout Description
49124 \begin_inset space ~
49128 \begin_inset space ~
49132 \begin_inset space ~
49135 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
49136 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
49137 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
49140 \begin_layout Description
49142 \begin_inset space ~
49146 \begin_inset space ~
49152 \begin_layout Description
49154 \begin_inset space ~
49158 \begin_inset space ~
49161 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
49162 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
49165 \begin_layout Description
49167 \begin_inset space ~
49171 \begin_inset space ~
49174 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49180 \begin_inset Index idx
49183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49190 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
49191 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
49193 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
49194 with the default encoding (
49196 Unicode (utf8) [default]
49202 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
49203 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
49208 \begin_layout Description
49210 \begin_inset space ~
49218 \begin_inset space ~
49221 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
49228 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
49231 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49238 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
49239 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
49241 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
49244 \begin_layout Description
49246 \begin_inset space ~
49250 \begin_inset space ~
49253 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49259 \begin_inset Index idx
49262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49270 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
49273 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
49275 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
49276 This used to be more comprehensive than
49279 \begin_inset space ~
49284 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
49289 \begin_layout Description
49291 \begin_inset space ~
49294 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49300 \begin_inset Index idx
49303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49305 packages ! inputenc
49312 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
49313 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
49315 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
49316 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
49317 with the default encoding (
49319 Unicode (utf8) [default]
49325 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
49326 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
49331 \begin_layout Description
49333 \begin_inset space ~
49337 \begin_inset space ~
49341 \begin_inset space ~
49344 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
49345 \begin_inset space ~
49351 \begin_layout Description
49353 \begin_inset space ~
49357 \begin_inset space ~
49361 \begin_inset space ~
49364 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
49365 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
49366 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
49370 \begin_layout Description
49372 \begin_inset space ~
49376 \begin_inset space ~
49380 \begin_inset space ~
49383 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
49384 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
49387 \begin_layout Section
49389 \begin_inset Index idx
49392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49399 \begin_inset Index idx
49402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49409 \begin_inset Index idx
49412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49413 Color ! Shaded boxes
49419 \begin_inset Index idx
49422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49423 Color ! Greyed-out notes
49431 \begin_layout Standard
49432 Here you can alter the font color for the
49436 (default: black), for
49439 \begin_inset space ~
49444 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
49448 (default: white) and for
49451 \begin_inset space ~
49461 sets the color back to the default.
49464 \begin_layout Standard
49465 Clicking any button showing
49473 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
49474 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
49475 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
49476 later more quickly.
49479 \begin_layout Standard
49480 Note, if you change the
49483 \begin_inset space ~
49488 font color and use the option
49491 \begin_inset space ~
49496 in the document settings under
49499 \begin_inset space ~
49504 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
49505 \begin_inset space ~
49509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49511 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
49518 \begin_layout Standard
49519 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
49525 \begin_layout Standard
49529 \begin_inset space ~
49538 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
49541 \begin_inset space ~
49544 Code after a forced page break:
49547 \begin_layout Itemize
49548 For the page color:
49549 \begin_inset Newline newline
49556 pagecolor{color name}
49559 \begin_layout Itemize
49560 For the text color:
49561 \begin_inset Newline newline
49571 \begin_layout Standard
49572 You are restricted to one of
49608 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
49615 \begin_inset space ~
49621 \begin_inset Newline newline
49624 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
49625 names to refer to them:
49628 \begin_layout Itemize
49634 \begin_inset Newline newline
49639 page_backgroundcolor
49642 \begin_layout Itemize
49646 \begin_inset space ~
49652 \begin_inset Newline newline
49660 \begin_layout Itemize
49664 \begin_inset space ~
49670 \begin_inset Newline newline
49678 \begin_layout Itemize
49682 \begin_inset space ~
49688 \begin_inset Newline newline
49696 \begin_layout Standard
49697 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
49700 \begin_inset space ~
49708 \begin_inset space ~
49716 \begin_layout Section
49718 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
49722 \begin_layout Standard
49724 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
49725 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
49726 \begin_inset space ~
49730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49732 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49740 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
49741 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
49744 \begin_layout Standard
49746 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
49747 Additionally, you can advise
49748 \change_inserted 630872221 1622044204
49751 \change_deleted 630872221 1622044196
49753 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
49754 to place a change bar in the margin of the output.
49755 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
49758 \begin_layout Section
49762 \begin_layout Standard
49763 Here you can adjust the
49767 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
49771 as described in section
49772 \begin_inset space ~
49776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49778 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
49783 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
49787 \begin_layout Standard
49789 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
49790 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
49792 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of
49793 this package can be used as well.
49794 The most common one are:
49797 \begin_layout Description
49799 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
49800 right Line numbers to the right margin
49803 \begin_layout Description
49805 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
49806 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
49810 \begin_layout Description
49812 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
49813 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
49816 \begin_layout Description
49818 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
49819 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
49822 \begin_layout Description
49824 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
49825 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
49828 \begin_layout Description
49830 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
49832 \begin_inset space ~
49835 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
49840 \begin_layout Section
49844 \begin_layout Standard
49845 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49851 \begin_inset Index idx
49854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49856 packages ! biblatex
49866 \begin_inset Index idx
49869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49881 \begin_inset Index idx
49884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49892 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49895 Sectioned bibliography
49897 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49903 \begin_inset Index idx
49906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49908 packages ! bibtopic
49918 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
49919 Finally, you can select a document-specific
49923 for the generation of the bibliography.
49924 For a further description of these possibilities see section
49925 \begin_inset space ~
49929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49931 reference "sec:Bibliography"
49938 \begin_layout Section
49942 \begin_layout Standard
49943 Here you can define the
49947 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
49949 \begin_inset space ~
49953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49955 reference "sec:Index"
49962 \begin_layout Section
49966 \begin_layout Standard
49967 The PDF properties are explained in section
49968 \begin_inset space ~
49972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49974 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
49981 \begin_layout Section
49985 \begin_layout Standard
49986 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
49987 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49993 \begin_inset Index idx
49996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50008 \begin_inset Index idx
50011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50023 \begin_inset Index idx
50026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50038 \begin_inset Index idx
50041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50053 \begin_inset Index idx
50056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50058 packages ! mathdots
50068 \begin_inset Index idx
50071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50073 packages ! mathtools
50083 \begin_inset Index idx
50086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50098 \begin_inset Index idx
50101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50103 packages ! stackrel
50113 \begin_inset Index idx
50116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50118 packages ! stmaryrd
50128 \begin_inset Index idx
50131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50133 packages ! undertilde
50138 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
50141 \begin_layout Description
50142 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
50143 -errors in formulas,
50144 ensure that you have this enabled.
50147 \begin_layout Description
50148 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
50149 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
50150 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
50154 \begin_layout Description
50155 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
50158 \begin_inset space ~
50170 \begin_layout Description
50171 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
50174 \begin_inset space ~
50186 \begin_layout Description
50187 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
50198 \begin_layout Description
50199 mathtools is used for the math commands
50235 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
50242 \begin_layout Description
50243 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
50245 Chemical Symbols and Equations
50254 \begin_layout Description
50255 stackrel is used for the math command
50272 \begin_layout Description
50273 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
50276 \begin_layout Description
50277 undertilde is used for the math command
50285 Accents for one Character
50294 \begin_layout Section
50296 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
50298 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
50304 \begin_layout Standard
50306 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
50307 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
50310 \begin_layout Standard
50312 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
50313 The float placement options
50314 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
50317 are described in the section
50320 \begin_inset space ~
50324 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
50326 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
50334 \begin_inset space ~
50342 \begin_layout Section
50346 \begin_layout Standard
50347 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
50349 Program Code Listings
50354 \begin_inset space ~
50362 \begin_layout Section
50366 \begin_layout Standard
50367 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
50375 set to be used and set the
50380 The itemize environment is described in section
50381 \begin_inset space ~
50385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50387 reference "sec:Itemize"
50394 \begin_layout Standard
50395 You can furthermore specify a
50398 \begin_inset space ~
50403 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50404 command of the desired character.
50405 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
50412 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
50414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50418 \begin_inset space \space{}
50422 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
50432 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
50433 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
50436 \begin_layout Standard
50437 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50445 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50446 -packages in the preamble (menu
50449 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50450 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50453 \begin_inset space ~
50459 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
50463 usepackage{textcomp}
50466 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
50470 usepackage{amssymb}
50480 \begin_layout Section
50484 \begin_layout Standard
50485 Branches are described in section
50486 \begin_inset space ~
50490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50492 reference "sec:Branches"
50499 \begin_layout Section
50501 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50503 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
50510 \begin_layout Standard
50511 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
50514 \begin_layout Description
50516 \begin_inset space ~
50520 \begin_inset space ~
50523 Format: The format that is used when you enter
50524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50543 View Master Document
50544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50551 Update Master Document
50552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50559 menu or the toolbar.
50560 The default is set in
50562 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50563 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50565 \begin_inset space ~
50568 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
50572 \begin_inset space ~
50576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50578 reference "sec:File-Formats"
50585 \begin_layout Description
50587 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
50589 \begin_inset space ~
50593 \begin_inset space ~
50597 \begin_inset space ~
50600 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
50605 option which is needed with some packages.
50606 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
50607 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
50610 \begin_layout Description
50612 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
50614 \begin_inset space ~
50618 \begin_inset space ~
50621 Options offers settings for the
50629 \begin_layout Itemize
50633 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
50635 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
50637 \begin_inset space ~
50643 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
50645 \begin_inset space ~
50649 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
50655 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
50657 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
50658 settings for the menu
50660 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50664 \begin_inset space ~
50668 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
50671 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
50672 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
50677 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
50679 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
50681 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
50684 or a detailed description see section
50686 Reverse DVI/PDF search
50691 \begin_inset space ~
50697 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
50701 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
50705 \begin_layout Itemize
50707 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
50710 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
50712 determines whether so-called
50713 \begin_inset Quotes els
50717 \begin_inset Quotes ers
50721 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
50723 \begin_inset Quotes els
50727 \begin_inset Quotes ers
50730 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
50731 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
50732 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
50734 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
50736 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
50737 macros, you can uncheck this.
50738 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
50745 \begin_layout Description
50747 \begin_inset space ~
50751 \begin_inset space ~
50754 Options offers settings for the export format
50762 \begin_inset space ~
50767 will assure that the output follows exactly version
50768 \begin_inset space ~
50771 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
50775 \begin_inset space ~
50780 settings are described in detail in section
50782 Math Output in XHTML
50787 \begin_inset space ~
50796 \begin_inset space ~
50800 \begin_inset space ~
50805 is used for the size of equations in the output.
50808 \begin_layout Description
50810 \begin_inset space ~
50815 Save transient properties
50817 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
50818 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
50819 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
50823 \begin_layout Itemize
50824 the activation of change tracking
50827 \begin_layout Itemize
50828 the output of tracked changes
50831 \begin_layout Itemize
50832 the recording of the document directory path.
50835 \begin_layout Standard
50836 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
50837 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
50841 \begin_layout Section
50849 \begin_layout Standard
50850 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50852 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
50854 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
50856 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
50860 \begin_layout Standard
50861 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50862 -syntax is given in section
50863 \begin_inset space ~
50867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50869 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
50876 \begin_layout Chapter
50882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50884 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
50889 \begin_inset Index idx
50892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50901 \begin_layout Standard
50902 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
50904 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50908 It has the following submenus.
50911 \begin_layout Section
50915 \begin_layout Subsection
50919 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50920 User Interface File
50921 \begin_inset Index idx
50924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50925 Customization ! of toolbars
50931 \begin_inset Index idx
50934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50935 Customization ! of menus
50943 \begin_layout Standard
50944 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
50945 interface (ui) file.
50946 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
50954 \begin_layout Description
50959 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
50962 \begin_layout Description
50969 the menu entries in popup context menus
50972 \begin_layout Description
50977 specifies the toolbar buttons
50980 \begin_layout Standard
50981 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
50982 and edit the entries.
50985 \begin_layout Standard
50986 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
50998 entries must be finished with an explicit
51023 and in the case of the
51024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51036 The syntax for the entries is:
51039 \begin_layout Standard
51040 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
51046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51069 \begin_layout Standard
51071 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
51074 All the \SpecialChar LyX
51075 -functions are listed in the menu
51077 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
51079 \begin_inset space ~
51087 \begin_layout Standard
51088 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
51094 \begin_layout Standard
51095 For example, assuming you use the menu
51097 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
51100 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
51104 \begin_layout Standard
51105 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
51111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51129 \begin_layout Standard
51131 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
51135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51146 to have the sixth bookmark.
51149 \begin_layout Standard
51153 \begin_inset space ~
51158 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
51159 's toolbar buttons.
51160 The currently available icon sets are compared in
51161 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51164 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
51172 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51176 \begin_layout Standard
51179 Enable tool tips in main work area
51181 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
51185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51189 \begin_layout Standard
51194 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
51195 should display in the menu
51197 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51199 \begin_inset space ~
51207 \begin_layout Subsection
51211 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51215 \begin_layout Standard
51218 Restore window layouts and geometries
51221 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
51222 the last \SpecialChar LyX
51226 \begin_layout Standard
51229 Restore cursor positions
51231 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
51235 \begin_layout Standard
51238 Load opened files from last session
51240 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
51244 \begin_layout Standard
51247 Clear all session information
51249 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
51250 sessions (cursor positions, names
51251 of last opened documents, etc.).
51254 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51256 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51258 name "subsec:Backup documents"
51263 \begin_inset Index idx
51266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51275 \begin_layout Standard
51278 Backup original documents when saving
51280 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
51281 it was saved the last time.
51282 It is stored in the
51285 \begin_inset space ~
51291 \begin_inset space ~
51295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51297 reference "sec:Paths"
51301 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
51304 \begin_inset space ~
51310 The backup file has the file extension
51311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51325 \begin_layout Standard
51328 Backup documents, every
51330 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
51333 \begin_layout Standard
51336 Save documents compressed by default
51338 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
51339 \begin_inset space ~
51343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51345 reference "subsec:Compressed"
51350 This applies to newly created documents only.
51351 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
51354 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51355 Windows & work area
51358 \begin_layout Standard
51361 Open documents in tabs
51363 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
51367 \begin_layout Standard
51372 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
51377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51379 \begin_inset space ~
51383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51385 reference "sec:Paths"
51389 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
51396 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
51397 documents will be opened in the same running instance
51398 of \SpecialChar LyX
51400 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
51401 instance is created for each file.
51404 \begin_layout Standard
51407 Single close-tab button
51409 is checked, there will only be one close button (
51419 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
51420 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
51421 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
51425 \begin_layout Standard
51426 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
51429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51434 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
51435 before the change takes effect.
51443 \begin_layout Standard
51448 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
51450 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
51452 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
51456 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
51457 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
51458 and only want to close the view in once instance.
51461 \begin_layout Subsection
51463 \begin_inset Index idx
51466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51475 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
51482 \begin_layout Standard
51483 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
51487 \begin_layout Standard
51488 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
51491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51496 This section only deals with the fonts
51500 the \SpecialChar LyX
51502 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
51505 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51506 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51517 \begin_layout Standard
51518 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
51535 (depends on the system) as its
51538 \begin_inset space ~
51554 \begin_layout Standard
51555 You can change the font size with the
51562 \begin_layout Standard
51567 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
51569 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51572 points have the size of 1
51573 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51577 \begin_inset space ~
51581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51583 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
51588 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
51589 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51593 The sizes are explained in detail in section
51594 \begin_inset space ~
51598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51600 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
51607 \begin_layout Subsection
51609 \begin_inset Index idx
51612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51613 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
51620 \begin_inset Index idx
51623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51632 \begin_layout Standard
51633 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
51634 by choosing an item in the
51635 list and selecting the
51642 \begin_layout Standard
51643 By checking the option
51647 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
51650 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
51651 \begin_inset space ~
51655 \begin_inset space ~
51660 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
51663 \begin_layout Subsection
51665 \begin_inset Index idx
51668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51677 \begin_layout Standard
51678 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
51682 \begin_layout Standard
51687 enables previewing snippets of your document.
51688 This feature is described in section
51689 \begin_inset space ~
51693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51695 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
51702 \begin_layout Standard
51703 Checking the option
51706 \begin_inset space ~
51710 \begin_inset space ~
51714 \begin_inset space ~
51719 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
51722 \begin_layout Section
51724 \begin_inset Index idx
51727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51736 \begin_layout Subsection
51740 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51744 \begin_layout Standard
51747 Cursor follows scrollbar
51749 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
51753 \begin_layout Standard
51754 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
51755 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
51756 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
51759 \begin_layout Standard
51762 Scroll below end of document
51764 is self-explanatory.
51767 \begin_layout Standard
51768 In \SpecialChar LyX
51769 one can jump from word to word by pressing
51776 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
51778 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
51779 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
51780 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
51784 \begin_layout Standard
51786 \change_inserted -712698321 1607270592
51789 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
51791 is only relevant in documents that
51796 In such documents, change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is
51805 markup) with this option selected.
51806 It the option is not selected, pasted text will be inserted without any
51808 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51812 \begin_inset Quotes els
51816 \begin_inset Quotes ers
51820 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
51821 dissolving from insets.
51826 track changes, pasted text is
51831 \begin_inset Quotes els
51835 \begin_inset Quotes ers
51838 notwithstanding the state of this option.
51843 \begin_layout Standard
51846 Sort environments alphabetically
51848 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
51851 \begin_layout Standard
51854 Group environments by their category
51856 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
51859 \begin_layout Standard
51864 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
51873 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
51877 \begin_layout Standard
51879 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
51882 Search drive for cited files
51884 allows \SpecialChar LyX
51885 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
51888 \begin_inset space ~
51892 \begin_inset space ~
51896 \begin_inset space ~
51900 \begin_inset space ~
51903 Content\SpecialChar ldots
51906 context menu on a citation.
51910 \change_deleted 630872221 1622118829
51912 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
51915 field determines the search pattern.
51917 \begin_inset space ~
51921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51923 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
51932 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51936 \begin_layout Standard
51937 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
51942 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
51943 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
51947 \begin_layout Subsection
51949 \begin_inset Index idx
51952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51959 \begin_inset Index idx
51962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51963 Settings ! Shortcuts
51971 \begin_layout Standard
51976 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
51978 Several binding files are available, among them:
51981 \begin_layout Description
51982 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
51985 \begin_layout Description
51986 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
51998 \begin_layout Description
51999 mac.bind a set of bindings for
52002 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52010 \begin_layout Standard
52011 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
52016 , and binding files for special languages.
52017 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
52018 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52022 \begin_inset space \space{}
52026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52034 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
52035 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
52036 will try to use the appropriate binding
52040 \begin_layout Standard
52041 Some binding files, like
52045 , only have a limited scope.
52046 When looking at the end of the file
52050 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
52053 \begin_layout Standard
52057 \begin_inset space ~
52061 \begin_inset space ~
52066 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
52067 in the selected key binding file.
52070 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52072 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52074 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
52079 \begin_inset Index idx
52082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52083 Key Bindings ! Editing
52091 \begin_layout Standard
52092 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
52093 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
52094 functions and the bound shortcuts.
52095 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
52098 Show key-bindings containing
52101 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
52102 Insert there for example as keyword
52103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52110 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
52111 functions that contain
52112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52120 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
52121 All \SpecialChar LyX
52122 functions are also listed in the file
52127 that you will find in the
52134 \begin_layout Standard
52135 For example, to add the shortcut
52143 , select the function and press the
52148 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
52149 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
52152 \begin_layout Standard
52153 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
52154 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
52159 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
52161 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
52166 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated
52169 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
52173 \begin_layout Standard
52174 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
52177 \begin_layout Standard
52178 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
52180 The syntax of the entries is:
52183 \begin_layout Standard
52189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52208 \begin_layout Standard
52209 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
52210 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
52211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52238 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
52239 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
52240 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
52241 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
52243 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
52247 , you needed to specify it as
52252 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
52255 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
52258 \begin_layout Subsection
52260 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52262 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
52267 \begin_inset Index idx
52270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52277 \begin_inset Index idx
52280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52281 Settings ! Keyboard Map
52289 \begin_layout Standard
52290 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
52291 For the case where this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
52292 provides keyboard maps.
52293 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
52294 is a Romanian one, you can enable
52297 \begin_inset space ~
52301 \begin_inset space ~
52306 and select the keyboard map file named
52313 \begin_layout Standard
52322 keyboard map and, if you use the
52326 bindings, you can select the first and second with
52329 arg "keymap-primary"
52335 arg "keymap-secondary"
52338 respectively or toggle between them with
52341 arg "keymap-toggle"
52347 \begin_layout Standard
52348 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
52351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52356 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
52365 \begin_layout Standard
52366 You can also specify the mouse
52368 Wheel scrolling speed
52371 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
52375 Middle mouse button pasting
52377 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
52378 inserts the content of the clipboard.
52381 \begin_layout Standard
52389 \begin_inset space ~
52393 \begin_inset space ~
52398 you can select a key for zooming.
52399 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
52402 \begin_layout Subsection
52406 \begin_layout Standard
52407 Input completion is described in section
52408 \begin_inset space ~
52412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52414 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
52421 \begin_layout Section
52423 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52430 \begin_inset Index idx
52433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52440 \begin_inset Index idx
52443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52452 \begin_layout Standard
52453 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
52454 are normally determined during
52456 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
52459 \begin_layout Description
52461 \begin_inset space ~
52464 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
52465 's working directory.
52466 It is the default when you
52477 \begin_inset space ~
52485 \begin_layout Description
52487 \begin_inset space ~
52490 templates This directory
52491 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
52492 contains the templates that are shown
52493 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
52494 will be opened when you use the menu
52495 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
52500 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52502 \begin_inset space ~
52506 \begin_inset space ~
52514 \begin_layout Description
52516 \begin_inset space ~
52519 files This directory
52520 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
52521 will be opened when you use the
52522 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
52523 contains the example files that are listed in
52526 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
52535 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52537 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
52539 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
52545 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
52547 \begin_inset Newline newline
52551 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
52554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52563 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
52564 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
52574 \begin_layout Description
52576 \begin_inset space ~
52580 \begin_inset Index idx
52583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52589 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
52590 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
52591 \begin_inset space ~
52595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52597 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
52605 will be used to save the backups.
52606 \begin_inset Newline newline
52609 Backup files have the ending
52610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52620 \begin_layout Description
52622 \begin_inset space ~
52625 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
52626 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
52628 \begin_inset Newline newline
52635 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52641 You can edit this file with the program
52650 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
52651 in its preferences under
52654 \begin_inset space ~
52660 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
52665 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
52667 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
52668 in your \SpecialChar LyX
52674 and \SpecialChar LyX
52675 need to be running the same time.
52676 \begin_inset Newline newline
52679 The pipe is also used for the
52683 feature, see section
52684 \begin_inset space ~
52688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52690 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
52695 \begin_inset Newline newline
52698 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
52699 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
52700 \begin_inset Newline newline
52716 \begin_layout Description
52718 \begin_inset space ~
52721 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
52724 \begin_layout Description
52726 \begin_inset space ~
52729 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
52730 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
52731 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
52734 \begin_layout Description
52736 \begin_inset space ~
52739 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
52745 You only need to specify it if you are using
52749 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
52751 For \SpecialChar LyX
52756 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
52760 \begin_layout Description
52762 \begin_inset space ~
52765 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
52766 When \SpecialChar LyX
52767 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
52768 to find it on the system.
52769 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
52771 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
52773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52777 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52780 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
52781 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
52784 \begin_layout Description
52786 \begin_inset space ~
52789 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
52790 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
52791 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
52792 code or in the document
52794 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
52796 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
52797 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
52798 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
52799 scanned for the input files.
52800 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
52801 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
52803 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
52804 compilation may fail for some documents.
52807 \begin_layout Section
52811 \begin_layout Standard
52812 Here you can insert your
52821 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
52823 \begin_inset space ~
52827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52829 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
52833 , to mark changes you make as yours.
52836 \begin_layout Section
52838 \begin_inset Index idx
52841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52842 Language ! Settings
52848 \begin_inset Index idx
52851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52852 Settings ! Language
52860 \begin_layout Subsection
52862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52864 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
52871 \begin_layout Description
52873 \begin_inset space ~
52877 \begin_inset space ~
52880 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
52882 You can find its actual translation status here:
52883 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52885 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
52891 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
52895 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52897 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
52898 LaTeX Language Support
52903 \begin_layout Description
52905 \begin_inset space ~
52908 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
52909 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
52910 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
52911 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
52912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52928 The most widespread language package is
52933 \begin_inset Index idx
52936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52943 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
52945 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
52946 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
52947 come with the alternative
52953 \begin_inset Index idx
52956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52958 packages ! polyglossia
52963 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
52964 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
52970 The available selections are described in section
52971 \begin_inset space ~
52975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52977 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
52984 \begin_layout Description
52986 \begin_inset space ~
52990 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
52991 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
52992 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
52994 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
52998 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
53002 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
53004 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
53008 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
53009 that is used to switch to a different language
53010 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
53011 to start the package
53015 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
53016 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
53020 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
53021 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
53024 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
53028 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
53036 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
53044 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
53047 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
53049 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
53053 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
53071 selectlanguage{$$lang}
53072 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
53079 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
53080 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53085 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
53090 , this setting is ignored.
53095 \begin_layout Description
53097 \begin_inset space ~
53101 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
53108 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
53109 Use this if the language switch set in
53113 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
53117 's alternative command
53121 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
53122 \SpecialChar allowbreak
53125 end{otherlanguage*}
53129 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
53130 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
53131 command toggles the package on and off
53132 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
53133 Empty by default, as
53137 selectlanguage{$$lang}
53139 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
53144 selectlanguage{$$lang}
53150 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
53155 , this setting is ignored.
53160 \begin_layout Description
53162 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
53164 \begin_inset space ~
53168 \begin_inset space ~
53171 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
53175 \begin_layout Description
53177 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
53179 \begin_inset space ~
53183 \begin_inset space ~
53186 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
53192 \begin_layout Description
53194 \begin_inset space ~
53198 \begin_inset space ~
53202 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
53204 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
53207 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
53208 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
53211 to the document class options
53212 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
53213 rather than the language package options.
53214 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
53218 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
53219 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
53221 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
53222 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
53224 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
53229 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
53230 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
53239 \begin_layout Description
53241 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
53243 \begin_inset space ~
53247 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
53249 \begin_inset space ~
53253 \begin_inset space ~
53257 \begin_inset space ~
53263 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
53265 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
53268 this option is set,
53269 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
53270 the language switch defined in
53273 \begin_inset space ~
53278 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
53279 to the document language.
53280 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
53281 This might be needed if you use a non-default
53284 \begin_inset space ~
53289 or if a package resets the document language.
53290 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
53291 usually should be the document language).
53292 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
53293 documents start with the chosen document language.
53294 When this option is not set, the
53297 \begin_inset space ~
53302 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53304 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
53307 \begin_inset space ~
53317 \begin_layout Description
53319 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
53321 \begin_inset space ~
53325 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
53327 \begin_inset space ~
53331 \begin_inset space ~
53335 \begin_inset space ~
53341 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
53345 \begin_inset space ~
53349 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
53350 Set document language explicitly
53356 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
53358 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
53364 \begin_inset space ~
53370 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
53372 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
53376 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
53378 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
53381 the end of the document.
53382 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
53386 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53387 \paragraph_spacing single
53389 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
53395 \begin_layout Description
53397 \begin_inset space ~
53401 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
53403 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
53407 \begin_inset space ~
53411 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
53413 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
53415 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
53419 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
53422 in a language different
53423 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
53425 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
53428 the document language will be
53429 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
53430 marked (by default with a blue
53433 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
53435 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
53439 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
53443 \begin_layout Description
53445 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
53447 \begin_inset space ~
53451 \begin_inset space ~
53455 \begin_inset space ~
53458 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
53459 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
53460 switched via the operating system.
53461 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
53463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53466 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
53467 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
53472 \begin_layout Description
53474 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
53476 \begin_inset space ~
53480 \begin_inset space ~
53483 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
53484 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
53489 \begin_layout Description
53491 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
53493 \begin_inset space ~
53497 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
53499 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
53503 \begin_inset space ~
53507 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
53508 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
53509 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
53511 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
53515 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
53517 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
53518 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
53520 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
53521 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
53522 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
53524 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
53529 \begin_layout Standard
53534 means that the cursor
53535 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
53536 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
53537 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
53539 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53542 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
53543 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
53547 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
53549 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
53550 specific case always means: move
53554 in text (even if this means:
53560 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
53561 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
53562 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
53563 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
53564 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
53565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53576 \begin_layout Standard
53578 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
53583 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
53584 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
53585 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
53589 ) when coming from the left.
53590 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
53592 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
53593 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
53594 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
53599 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53601 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
53605 \begin_layout Description
53607 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
53609 \begin_inset space ~
53613 \begin_inset space ~
53616 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
53617 separator alignment).
53618 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
53620 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53623 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
53624 (static) custom character here.
53627 \begin_layout Description
53629 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
53631 \begin_inset space ~
53635 \begin_inset space ~
53638 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
53644 \begin_layout Subsection
53648 \begin_layout Standard
53649 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
53650 \begin_inset space ~
53654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53656 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
53663 \begin_layout Section
53667 \begin_layout Subsection
53669 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53671 name "subsec:General-output"
53678 \begin_layout Description
53680 \begin_inset space ~
53683 search Commands that will be used for the menu
53685 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
53687 \begin_inset space ~
53693 For a detailed description see section
53695 Reverse DVI/PDF search
53700 \begin_inset space ~
53708 \begin_layout Description
53710 \begin_inset space ~
53713 Options Options for the program
53717 that is used for the export format
53722 \begin_inset space ~
53726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53728 reference "subsec:Export"
53733 Possible options are listed in the
53738 \begin_inset Newline newline
53742 \begin_inset Flex URL
53745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53747 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
53757 \begin_layout Description
53759 \begin_inset space ~
53763 \begin_inset space ~
53766 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
53769 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
53770 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
53772 \begin_inset space ~
53778 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
53781 \begin_layout Description
53783 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
53785 \begin_inset space ~
53789 \begin_inset Index idx
53792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53799 \begin_inset Index idx
53802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53803 Settings ! Date format
53808 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
53809 \begin_inset Newline newline
53813 \begin_inset Flex URL
53816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53818 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
53824 \begin_inset Newline newline
53827 For example the format
53828 \begin_inset Newline newline
53832 \begin_inset Newline newline
53835 prints the date as day/month/year.
53840 \begin_layout Description
53842 \begin_inset space ~
53846 \begin_inset space ~
53849 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
53850 is allowed to overwrite on export.
53853 \begin_layout Subsection
53859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53861 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
53866 \begin_inset Index idx
53869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53870 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
53879 \begin_layout Description
53881 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
53883 \begin_inset space ~
53891 \begin_inset space ~
53895 \begin_inset space ~
53898 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
53903 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
53924 are used for Cyrillic.
53925 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
53926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53938 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
53940 sets up in the background.
53941 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
53946 \begin_layout Description
53948 \begin_inset space ~
53952 \begin_inset space ~
53956 \begin_inset space ~
53960 \begin_inset space ~
53963 options They only have an effect when the program
53967 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
53970 \begin_layout Standard
53971 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
53972 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
53973 manuals of the applications.
53976 \begin_layout Description
53978 \begin_inset space ~
53981 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
53982 \begin_inset space ~
53986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53988 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
53995 \begin_layout Description
53997 \begin_inset space ~
54000 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
54001 \begin_inset space ~
54005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54007 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
54014 \begin_layout Description
54016 \begin_inset space ~
54019 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
54020 \begin_inset space ~
54024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54026 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
54033 \begin_layout Description
54039 \begin_inset space ~
54042 command Command for the program
54044 Check\SpecialChar TeX
54047 that is described in the section
54049 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
54054 Additional Features
54059 \begin_layout Standard
54060 There are additionally the following options:
54063 \begin_layout Description
54065 \begin_inset space ~
54069 \begin_inset space ~
54073 \begin_inset space ~
54077 \begin_inset space ~
54082 \begin_inset space ~
54085 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
54086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54103 to separate folders.
54104 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
54106 \begin_inset Index idx
54109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54116 \begin_inset Index idx
54119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54128 \begin_layout Description
54130 \begin_inset space ~
54134 \begin_inset space ~
54138 \begin_inset space ~
54142 \begin_inset space ~
54146 \begin_inset space ~
54150 \begin_inset space ~
54153 changes Removes all manually set
54159 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54160 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
54162 \begin_inset space ~
54167 dialog when changing the document class.
54170 \begin_layout Section
54172 \begin_inset space ~
54176 \begin_inset Index idx
54179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54188 \begin_layout Subsection
54190 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54192 name "subsec:Converters"
54197 \begin_inset Index idx
54200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54209 \begin_layout Standard
54210 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
54211 from one format to another.
54212 You can modify converters or create new ones.
54213 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
54220 \begin_inset space ~
54225 field and press the
54230 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
54234 \begin_inset space ~
54239 drop-down list, modify the
54243 field and press the
54250 \begin_layout Standard
54253 Converter File Cache
54259 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
54261 Maximum Age (in days
54264 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
54265 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
54268 \begin_layout Standard
54269 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
54270 definition, is described in the section
54281 \begin_layout Subsection
54283 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54285 name "sec:File-Formats"
54290 \begin_inset Index idx
54293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54300 \begin_inset Index idx
54303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54312 \begin_layout Standard
54313 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
54323 programs that should be used for certain formats.
54326 \begin_layout Standard
54327 You can also define the
54329 Default output format
54331 that is used when you use
54333 View, Update, View Master Document
54337 Update Master Document
54343 menu or the toolbar.
54346 \begin_layout Standard
54347 More about formats and their options is described in the section
54358 \begin_layout Standard
54359 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
54361 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
54362 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
54363 This is done by specifying a
54368 More about this is described in the section
54379 \begin_layout Chapter
54380 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
54382 \begin_inset Index idx
54385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54392 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54394 name "chap:Units-available-in"
54401 \begin_layout Standard
54403 \begin_inset space ~
54407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54409 reference "tab:Units"
54413 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
54414 and used in this documentation.
54417 \begin_layout Standard
54418 \begin_inset Float table
54425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54426 \begin_inset Caption Standard
54428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54444 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
54450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54452 \begin_inset Tabular
54453 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
54454 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
54455 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
54456 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
54457 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
54459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54606 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54610 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
54614 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54771 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54775 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54808 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54849 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54881 scaled point (65536
54882 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54886 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54949 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
54954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
55001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
55010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
55019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
55032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
55041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
55050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
55063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
55072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55073 % of original image width
55078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
55081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
55092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
55101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
55110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
55123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
55132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
55141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55162 \begin_layout Standard
55163 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
55166 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
55173 \begin_layout Bibliography
55174 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55175 LatexCommand bibitem
55182 The \SpecialChar LyX
55184 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55187 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
55193 \begin_inset Newline newline
55197 \begin_inset Flex URL
55200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55202 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
55210 \begin_layout Bibliography
55211 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55212 LatexCommand bibitem
55213 key "latexcompanion"
55218 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
55220 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
55221 Companion Second Edition.
55224 Addison-Wesley, 2004
55227 \begin_layout Bibliography
55228 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55229 LatexCommand bibitem
55235 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
55238 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
55242 Addison-Wesley, 2003
55245 \begin_layout Bibliography
55246 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55247 LatexCommand bibitem
55256 : A Document Preparation System.
55259 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
55262 \begin_layout Bibliography
55263 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55264 LatexCommand bibitem
55274 The \SpecialChar TeX
55278 Addison-Wesley, 1984
55281 \begin_layout Bibliography
55282 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55283 LatexCommand bibitem
55289 The \SpecialChar TeX
55291 \begin_inset Newline newline
55295 \begin_inset Flex URL
55298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55300 https://ctan.org/topic
55308 \begin_layout Bibliography
55309 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55310 LatexCommand bibitem
55316 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
55318 \begin_inset Newline newline
55322 \begin_inset Flex URL
55325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55327 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
55335 \begin_layout Bibliography
55336 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55337 LatexCommand bibitem
55344 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55346 name "Documentation"
55347 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
55354 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
55358 \begin_inset Newline newline
55362 \begin_inset Flex URL
55365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55367 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
55375 \begin_layout Bibliography
55376 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55377 LatexCommand bibitem
55384 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55386 name "Documentation"
55387 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
55392 how to use the program
55394 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
55398 \begin_inset Newline newline
55402 \begin_inset Flex URL
55405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55407 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
55415 \begin_layout Bibliography
55416 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55417 LatexCommand bibitem
55424 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55426 name "Documentation"
55427 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
55432 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55438 \begin_inset Index idx
55441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55443 packages ! biblatex
55449 \begin_inset Newline newline
55453 \begin_inset Flex URL
55456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55458 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
55466 \begin_layout Bibliography
55467 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55468 LatexCommand bibitem
55475 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55477 name "Documentation"
55478 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
55483 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55489 \begin_inset Index idx
55492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55500 \begin_inset Newline newline
55504 \begin_inset Flex URL
55507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55509 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
55517 \begin_layout Bibliography
55518 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55519 LatexCommand bibitem
55526 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55528 name "Documentation"
55529 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
55539 \begin_inset Newline newline
55543 \begin_inset Flex URL
55546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55548 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
55556 \begin_layout Bibliography
55557 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55558 LatexCommand bibitem
55559 key "makeindex-man"
55565 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55568 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
55578 \begin_inset Newline newline
55582 \begin_inset Flex URL
55585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55587 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
55595 \begin_layout Bibliography
55596 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55597 LatexCommand bibitem
55604 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55606 name "Documentation"
55607 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
55617 \begin_inset Newline newline
55621 \begin_inset Flex URL
55624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55626 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
55634 \begin_layout Bibliography
55635 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55636 LatexCommand bibitem
55643 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55645 name "Documentation"
55646 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
55651 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
55653 \begin_inset Newline newline
55657 \begin_inset Flex URL
55660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55662 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
55670 \begin_layout Bibliography
55671 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55672 LatexCommand bibitem
55679 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55681 name "Documentation"
55682 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
55687 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55693 \begin_inset Index idx
55696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55704 \begin_inset Newline newline
55708 \begin_inset Flex URL
55711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55713 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
55721 \begin_layout Bibliography
55722 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55723 LatexCommand bibitem
55730 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55732 name "Documentation"
55733 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
55738 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55744 \begin_inset Index idx
55747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55749 packages ! enumitem
55755 \begin_inset Newline newline
55759 \begin_inset Flex URL
55762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55764 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
55772 \begin_layout Bibliography
55773 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55774 LatexCommand bibitem
55781 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55783 name "Documentation"
55784 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
55789 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55795 \begin_inset Index idx
55798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55800 packages ! fancyhdr
55806 \begin_inset Newline newline
55810 \begin_inset Flex URL
55813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55815 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
55823 \begin_layout Bibliography
55824 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55825 LatexCommand bibitem
55832 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55834 name "Documentation"
55835 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
55840 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55846 \begin_inset Index idx
55849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55851 packages ! hyperref
55857 \begin_inset Newline newline
55861 \begin_inset Flex URL
55864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55866 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
55874 \begin_layout Bibliography
55875 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55876 LatexCommand bibitem
55883 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55885 name "Documentation"
55886 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
55891 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55897 \begin_inset Index idx
55900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55902 packages ! microtype
55908 \begin_inset Newline newline
55912 \begin_inset Flex URL
55915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55917 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
55925 \begin_layout Bibliography
55926 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55927 LatexCommand bibitem
55934 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55936 name "Documentation"
55937 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
55942 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55948 \begin_inset Index idx
55951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55959 \begin_inset Newline newline
55963 \begin_inset Flex URL
55966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55968 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
55976 \begin_layout Bibliography
55977 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55978 LatexCommand bibitem
55985 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55987 name "Documentation"
55988 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
55993 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55999 \begin_inset Index idx
56002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56004 packages ! prettyref
56010 \begin_inset Newline newline
56014 \begin_inset Flex URL
56017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56019 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
56027 \begin_layout Bibliography
56028 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56029 LatexCommand bibitem
56036 \begin_inset CommandInset href
56038 name "Documentation"
56039 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
56044 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56050 \begin_inset Index idx
56053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56055 packages ! refstyle
56061 \begin_inset Newline newline
56065 \begin_inset Flex URL
56068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56070 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
56078 \begin_layout Bibliography
56079 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56080 LatexCommand bibitem
56087 \begin_inset CommandInset href
56090 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
56095 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
56097 \begin_inset Newline newline
56101 \begin_inset Flex URL
56104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56106 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
56114 \begin_layout Bibliography
56115 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56116 LatexCommand bibitem
56123 \begin_inset CommandInset href
56126 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
56131 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
56133 \begin_inset Newline newline
56137 \begin_inset Flex URL
56140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56142 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
56150 \begin_layout Bibliography
56151 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56152 LatexCommand bibitem
56159 \begin_inset CommandInset href
56162 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
56167 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
56168 for Cyrillic languages:
56169 \begin_inset Newline newline
56173 \begin_inset Flex URL
56176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56178 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
56186 \begin_layout Bibliography
56187 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56188 LatexCommand bibitem
56195 \begin_inset CommandInset href
56198 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
56203 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
56205 \begin_inset Newline newline
56209 \begin_inset Flex URL
56212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56214 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
56222 \begin_layout Bibliography
56223 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56224 LatexCommand bibitem
56231 \begin_inset CommandInset href
56234 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
56239 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
56241 \begin_inset Newline newline
56245 \begin_inset Flex URL
56248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56250 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
56258 \begin_layout Bibliography
56259 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56260 LatexCommand bibitem
56267 \begin_inset CommandInset href
56270 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
56275 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
56277 \begin_inset Newline newline
56281 \begin_inset Flex URL
56284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56286 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
56294 \begin_layout Standard
56295 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
56302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56329 \begin_inset Note Note
56332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56339 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
56340 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
56341 bibliography is the second one:
56349 \begin_layout Standard
56350 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
56351 LatexCommand bibtex
56352 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
56353 options "biblio/alphadin"
56360 \begin_layout Standard
56361 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
56365 \begin_layout Standard
56369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56375 pagedeclaration}[1]{
56378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56384 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
56392 \begin_inset Note Note
56395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56396 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
56397 \begin_inset space ~
56401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56403 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
56415 \begin_layout Standard
56416 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
56417 LatexCommand printnomenclature
56423 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
56424 LatexCommand printindex